JP2016101208A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of making a meaningful notification that can contribute to a profit of a player in a special game state.SOLUTION: A main CPU, based on a condition that the number of times of variable displays of a special symbol after an end of a big win game state reaches a prescribed number of times (190 times), can perform to a non-probability variation game state in which a stop display mode of the special symbol is relatively difficult to become a big win symbol. A sub CPU, based on a condition that the number of times of variable displays of a special symbol after an end of a big win game state reaches a special number of times (e.g., the number of times where 10 times are left) smaller than a prescribed number of times, and a first start memory is stored that determines the big win game state, can perform a notification to that effect by an emphasis display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 233

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a first identification information display device (first device) is provided on condition that a game ball launched into a gaming area on the gaming board passes through a first starting area (first starting port). In the special symbol display device), the first identification information (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, so that a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit game) On the other hand, on the condition that the game ball passes through the second starting area (second starting port), the second identification information (second special symbol display device) in the second identification information (second special display device) In some cases, a special game is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player. In the specific gaming state, a round game in which the variable winning device (large winning opening) provided in the gaming area is changed to be in an open mode and a closed mode is executed a plurality of times, and a game ball is placed in the open variable winning device. By winning a prize, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

  In addition, in this type of gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed as a special mode and then shifted to a specific gaming state, a special game that easily shifts to the specific gaming state again after the specific gaming state ends. Non-special gaming state that is difficult to shift to the specific gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state that has been shifted accordingly when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode other than the special mode, while controlling to be in the state Some of them are controlled so that

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, when the identification information is in the variable display, when the game ball passes through the start area, the fact that the variable display of the identification information is suspended is stored as a start memory, and in a specific manner. When there is a specific start memory to stop display, a prior notice effect execution pattern is assigned to each start memory stored before the specific start memory, and a predetermined start memory is determined based on the prior notice effect execution pattern. Has been proposed that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-102867 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned conventional patent document 1, even if the advance notice effect relating to the start-up memory is merely notified in advance of the transition to the specific gaming state, such a advance notice effect is temporarily provided. Even if the game is executed in the special game state, it is not suggested whether or not the special game state is entered again, and a significant notification that contributes to the profit of the player cannot be performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a significant notification that contributes to a player's profit in a special gaming state.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A first start area provided in the game area and into which a game medium can enter;
First storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not to enter a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that a game medium has entered the first start area When,
Based on the first condition that the first start memory is stored in the first storage means, the first identification information can be displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory. First identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode when the memory determines the specific gaming state;
A second start area provided in the game area and into which a game medium can enter;
Second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to enter the specific gaming state on condition that a game medium has entered the second start area;
Based on the second condition that the second start-up memory is stored in the second storage means, the second identification information can be displayed in a variable manner based on the second start-up memory. A second identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode when the memory determines the specific gaming state;
Specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode;
A special gaming state control means capable of controlling a special gaming state in which a stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is likely to be relatively relative to a specific display mode after the specific gaming state ends;
An informing means capable of informing predetermined information;
A gaming machine equipped with
The second condition has priority over the first condition,
The special gaming state control means may be configured to provide the first identification information or the second identification condition on condition that the first and second identification information and the second identification information have reached a predetermined number of times after the specific gaming state ends. The stop display mode of the identification information can be controlled to a non-special game state that is difficult to be relative to a specific display mode,
The notifying means has reached a special number in which the number of variable displays of the first identification information and the second identification information after the end of the specific gaming state is less than the predetermined number of times, and stores the special gaming state in the first storage means It is possible to perform a predetermined notification on condition that the first start memory for determining the specific gaming state is stored.

  According to such a configuration, after the specific gaming state is ended, when the number of changes in the identification information display reaches a special number less than the predetermined number, the specific game is reduced to a certain extent until the predetermined number of times the special gaming state ends. If the first start memory for determining the state is stored, the fact is notified, so that significant notification that contributes to the player's profit in the special gaming state can be performed. In other words, since the first start memory is not prioritized over the second start memory, if the predetermined notification is not performed, there is a possibility that the variable display of the first identification information based on the first start memory is not performed until the end of the special gaming state. . The first start memory may determine the specific game state in the special game state, but may not determine the specific game state in the non-special game state. In other words, it is not possible to shift to the specific gaming state, and there may be a disadvantage. In such a case, by performing a predetermined notification, it is possible to promote a variable display based on the first start memory that is not preferentially digested, and to prevent the above disadvantages from occurring.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A first variable winning device that is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to receive
A second variable winning device that is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be received;
First round game execution means capable of executing a first round game in which the first variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state;
Second round game execution means capable of executing a second round game in which the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state;
The second round game execution means, as the second round game,
An easy-to-pass round game in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area;
A difficult-to-pass round game in which a game medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area;
Is possible and
The specific gaming state is
A first specific game state in which at least the first round game and the difficult-to-pass round game are executed;
A second specific gaming state in which at least the first round game and the easy-to-pass round game are executed;
The notifying means has reached the special number of times that the first identification information and the second identification information have been changed after the end of the specific gaming state, and the first storage means stores the first specific information in the special gaming state. The predetermined notification is performed on condition that a first start memory for determining a gaming state is stored.

  According to such a configuration, after the specific gaming state is ended, when the number of times of display variation of the identification information reaches a special number, if the remaining number is reduced to a certain number until the special gaming state ends, the special gaming state is entered. If the first start memory for determining the first specific gaming state that is difficult to shift is stored, the fact is notified, so that the content indicating whether or not to shift to the special gaming state again in the special gaming state. As notification, significant notification that contributes to the profit of the player can be performed. That is, since the subject to be notified is the first start memory that determines the first specific game state, when the variable display based on the first start memory is performed, the special game state is not shifted. However, the first start memory may determine the specific gaming state in the special gaming state, but may not determine the specific gaming state in the non-special gaming state. That is, it is not possible to shift to the specific gaming state, and a loss may occur. In such a case, by performing a predetermined notification, it is possible to promote a variable display based on the first start memory that is not preferentially digested, and to prevent the above disadvantages from occurring. In short, the profit related to the special gaming state is lost, but the loss of the profit of the specific gaming state can be prevented.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
A variable winning device provided in the game area, which can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be received;
In the specific game state, a round game capable of executing an easy-to-pass round game in which a game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area and a difficult-to-pass round game in which a game medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area. Execution means;
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which only the difficult-to-pass round game is executed;
A second specific gaming state in which the easy-to-pass round game is executed at least once;
The notifying means has reached the special number of times that the first identification information and the second identification information have been changed after the end of the specific gaming state, and the first storage means stores the first specific information in the special gaming state. The predetermined notification is performed on condition that a first start memory for determining a gaming state is stored.

  Even in such a configuration, after the specific gaming state ends, when the number of times that the identification information fluctuates reaches a special number, and the remaining number of times reaches the predetermined number at which the special gaming state ends, the transition to the special gaming state occurs. If the first start memory for determining the difficult first specific gaming state is stored, the fact is notified, so that the notification of contents indicating whether or not to shift to the special gaming state again in the special gaming state. As a result, significant notification that contributes to the profit of the player can be performed. That is, since the subject to be notified is the first start memory that determines the first specific game state, when the variable display based on the first start memory is performed, the special game state is not shifted. However, the first start memory may determine the specific gaming state in the special gaming state, but may not determine the specific gaming state in the non-special gaming state. That is, it is not possible to shift to the specific gaming state, and a loss may occur. In such a case, by performing a predetermined notification, it is possible to promote a variable display based on the first start memory that is not preferentially digested, and to prevent the above disadvantages from occurring. In short, the profit related to the special gaming state is lost, but the loss of the profit of the specific gaming state can be prevented.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
A variable member that can be changed between an open mode in which a game medium can easily enter the second start area and a close mode in which the game medium cannot easily enter the second start area;
Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state in which the variable member is likely to change to an open mode after the end of the specific game state;
When the special gaming state control means is controlled to the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, the special gaming state control means is provided that the number of variable displays of the first identification information and the second identification information has reached a specific number of times. In addition, the variable member can be controlled to a non-special gaming state that is difficult to change to an open mode,
The specific number of times, the first specific number of times, and the first number of times, on the condition that the specific gaming state is controlled by the specific gaming state control means and is controlled to the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. A specific number of times determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including a second specific number of times greater than one specific number of times,
The specific number determining means determines the second specific number of times in the special gaming state rather than the non-special gaming state as the gaming state before being controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control unit. Has a relatively high probability of
The notifying means has reached a special number in which the number of variable displays of the first identification information and the second identification information is less than the specific number after the specific gaming state is ended, and the specific gaming state is stored in the first starting memory. The predetermined notification is performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining is stored.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific gaming state is controlled after the end of the specific gaming state, even in the special gaming state, the identification information variation display count reaches a special number less than the specific number of times. Thus, if the first start memory for determining the specific gaming state is stored when the remaining number of times reaches the specific number of times at which the special gaming state ends, the fact is notified so that the player's benefit even in the special gaming state Significant notification that contributes to That is, since the special game state is more likely to be given more times (specific number of times) to be continued as the special game state than the non-special game state, a profit related to the special game state can be obtained by performing a predetermined notification. Can do.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which can perform the significant alerting which contributes to a player's profit in a special game state can be provided.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a gaming board in a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram showing the gaming state and effect mode of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation | movement pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening-and-closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the super big bonus of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the challenge bonus of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the addition bonus of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in hit pattern 4 of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a hit pattern 11 and a hit pattern 5 of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for challenge success / failure lottery of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for one game combination lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the janken pattern lottery table (1) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the janken pattern lottery table (2) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 3 times challenge lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the success notification round lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the icon pattern lottery tables (4R)-(8R) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (4R white icon) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (5R white icon), (5R blue icon), (5R green icon), (5R red icon) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (6R white icon), (6R blue icon), (6R green icon), (6R red icon) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (7R white icon), (7R blue icon), (7R green icon), (7R red icon) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the icon change lottery table (8R white icon), (8R blue icon), (8R green icon), (8R red icon) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise success character band lottery table for the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise failure character belt lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2) and (surprise pattern No. 3) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise failure character belt lottery table (surprise pattern No. 4) and (surprise pattern No. 5) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise failure character belt lottery table (surprise pattern No. 6) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table (white icon) and (blue icon) for the surprise gasse character belt lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (green icon) and (red icon) for the surprise gasse character belt lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the surprise gasset subsequent character band lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for extra bonus continuous lottery selection of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario group lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario classification lottery table (hit pattern 4), (hit pattern 5), (hit pattern 6), (hit pattern 7) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario classification lottery table (hit pattern 8), (hit pattern 9), (hit pattern 10), and (hit pattern 11) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Aa) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ab) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ac) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ba) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Bb) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Bc) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Ca) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Cb) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the scenario number lottery table (Da) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Aa) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ab) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ac) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ba) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bb) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bb) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bb) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Bc) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ca) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Ca) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Cb) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition bonus scenario table (Da) of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the combo RUSH lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the roulette lottery table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the roulette pattern lottery table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for title determination lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for chance up lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for character type lottery (production type C or H) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + next round effect type F) (except for effect type D or J + next round effect type F) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. . Character type lottery table for game machines according to the first embodiment of the present invention (effect type E, F, K, or L + addition value due to appearance of character + 50), (addition value due to appearance type E, F, K, or L + character appearance) +100). Character type lottery table for game machines according to the first embodiment of the present invention (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value due to appearance of character + 150), (effect type E, F, K, or L + addition value due to appearance of character) +200). It is a figure which shows the cow character revival lottery table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for a bonus end screen lottery addition on the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the title determination lottery table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing operation button operation determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special mode process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the single game effect determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd challenge production | presentation determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the surprise effect determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the icon determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the character belt effect determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus reservation continuous determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus scenario classification determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus bonus initial process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus production | presentation determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production lottery determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus end screen determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball counter addition process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning notification process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process between super big bonus rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus round effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process between the single game rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process between the 3 times challenge rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between the surprise rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process between bonus rounds on the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the super big bonus round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during the challenge bonus round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during the single game round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the 3rd challenge round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during the surprise round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during an extra bonus round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the super big bonus completion | finish effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus completion | finish effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows V challenge completion | finish effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode change process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving mode completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ST mode end process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | emission error alerting | reporting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display at the normal time of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the time saving mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display in 1R-2R of the challenge bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 3 times challenge of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 3 times challenge of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 3 times challenge of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the surprise of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the surprise of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the surprise of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of V challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production pattern of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation | movement pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting storage area in the sub-control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pattern selection process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the gate switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode frequency counter update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the starting memory | storage number update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process before big winning opening release of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the big winning opening of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode control process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning notification process of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game flow of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base in which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed. And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (a player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3) A rear frame base plate (not shown) provided detachably, and a rear frame (not shown) supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is Since it is accommodated in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. In addition, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

  A decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics. Thereby, since the change in the display mode by light can be given, the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 that is provided below the upper tray 17 and can store, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p that can store a game ball, an upper plate upper cover 8a that is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge outlet 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the rear side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball path of a game ball paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), or a ball path cover (illustrated) that connects the discharge port and the supply port 21 to form a ball path. Abbreviation) is provided. When a game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game ball stays near the payout port 20 while the game ball is paid out. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are transferred from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. 18 is sent.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects as a player operates (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, in the drawing, as an example, the pressing operation button 9A protrudes from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 configured to be provided with a jog dial 9B is shown.

  In addition, about the front frame 3, in the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) toward the player side from the surface (front surface), for example, fraud such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act by the unauthorized member is performed on various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the part.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an unauthorized act, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back side of the front frame 3 at a portion where the invading act by the unauthorized member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to prepare a member for each of these functions separately. Therefore, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituting member includes a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

  A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The firing handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, and in the support portion. A launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the sphere, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the launch stop switch, and an opening on the handle grip 26d are provided. And a handle cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and is stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The game balls that have been played are launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the launch driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by a payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

  Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed in accordance with the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the launching solenoid (not shown) It is known to change the firing strength of the game ball by changing the power supplied to the abbreviation). However, the launching device 26 according to the present embodiment is configured to rotate the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b. A launching spring (not shown) that interlocks with the launching spring and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (clamping) the launching spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the turning amount of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the turning amount of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b to increase or weaken the degree of winding (clamping) of the launching spring. Increases or decreases the firing strength.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can flow and roll. doing. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first start port 32, a second start port 33, a blade member 34 that opens and closes the second start port 33, a passing gate 35, The first grand prize opening 36, the second big prize opening 37, the first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36, the second big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second big prize opening 37, the second Specific area 38A and non-specific area 38B located below the big prize opening 37, a displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, an out opening 41, an upper movable effect member 42A, and a lower movable effect The member 42B, the cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5 are provided. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start port 32, the second start port 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning port 36, the second large winning port 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning port 40. As a result, a winning area is formed. FIG. 3 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed.

  The guide rail 30 includes an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30 </ b> B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the inner side of the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The stage 31 distributes the game ball flow area in the game area 1 p and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or a stage 31 or the like driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning at any one of the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the first major winning port 36, the second major winning port 37, and the general winning port 40, and If the player does not win, or passes through the passage gate 35 and does not win after that, it is recovered by being discharged from the out port 41.

  Note that winning means that the game ball passes the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, thereby giving a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, symbol lottery, winning ball, etc. described later). It means to do. At this time, passing of the winning area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the winning area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering are substantially synonymous. Accordingly, both the passing of game balls and winning balls in the winning area lead to winning, and therefore, in the following description, “winning” is unified unless otherwise specified. The passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V winning”.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, since the launch force applied to the game ball is generally small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the stage 31. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down mainly on the right side of the stage 31. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left of the stage 31 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball to the right of the stage 31 is called “right-handed”.

  The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 provide a lottery opportunity on the condition that the game ball wins (enters), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives the opportunity to do. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 realize a first start region and a second start region.

  The first start port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins the first start port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided directly below the first start port 32. When a game ball wins the second start port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 33 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port 33, This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction, but for example, a so-called electric tulip type that widens the starting port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. Or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of a game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by a passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in a winning game state (a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The first grand prize winning port 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting port 32 and immediately below the passing gate 35. The second big prize opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the second start opening 33 and directly below the first big prize opening 36. Note that the positions at which the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second grand prize winning port 37 are arranged are not limited to the positions described above, and can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The first big winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large lateral dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. In the vicinity of the first big prize opening 36, a first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of a game ball in the first big prize opening 36 is detected by a first big prize opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

  The second large winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that game balls can be won one by one. In the vicinity of the second big prize opening 37, a second big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of a game ball in the second big prize opening 37 is detected by a second big prize opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

  The first grand prize opening shutter 36A switches the first big prize opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing so as to have a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. It arrange | positions so that the 1st big winning opening 36 may be covered in a closed state. That is, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A is first changed so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by a special prize opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

  The second big prize opening shutter 37A horizontally moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 to switch the second big prize opening 37 to an open state or a closed state. In the closed state, the second big prize opening 37 is opened. It is arranged to cover. That is, the second grand prize opening shutter 37A is changed so that it changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 37 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by a big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  The specific area 38 </ b> A and the non-specific area 38 </ b> B are areas through which a game ball that has won the second big prize opening 37 can subsequently pass and is covered with the cover member 43. The ball path of the game ball from the second big prize opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second big prize opening 37 passes through one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, and is then led to the back of the game board 1 and collected. A second grand prize port count switch 370 is disposed in the middle of the ball path from the second grand prize port 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided near the specific region 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. In other words, the displacement member 39 changes between an open state (first state) in which V winning of a game ball to the specific area 38A is easy and a closed state (second state) in which V winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball in which the V winning is impossible passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first grand prize port 36, the first grand prize port shutter 36A, the first grand prize port shutter solenoid 360A, and the first grand prize port count switch 360 are the first variable prize device. Realized. The second big prize port 37, the second big prize port shutter 37A, the second big prize port shutter solenoid 370A, and the second big prize port count switch 370 realize a second variable prize device.

  One or more general winning ports 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40, a lottery is not performed, but a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability / non-short-time gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are not probable. There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming state) that becomes higher than the non-temporary gaming state, and a time-short gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probabilistic non-temporary gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state When the lottery is won, the game shifts to a big hit game state (specific game state).

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric projectile. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls by winning a prize at the second starting port 33. Specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-short gaming state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (short-time gaming state 2). ), Which means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (time-short game state 3). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the short-time gaming state 1, the short-time gaming state 2, and the short-time gaming state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In the big hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state that has succeeded in winning the V prize in the specific area 38A, the player must make a transition to the probability change / short time gaming state (the normal change state in which the probability changing gaming state is in the short time gaming state). The probabilistic / non-time-saving gaming state (the non-probability-changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, ie, the normal gaming state) is not changed. On the other hand, if the big hit gaming state is completed without a V winning in the specific area 38A without succeeding in the non-V winning, the normal gaming state that is the non-probability variable gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the big winning gaming state ends. It is supposed to move to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state ends, for example, in the probability change / short-time gaming state, 190 special symbol lotteries (190 special symbol variation display or stop display) are performed. It shifts to the probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of special symbol variation display or stop display) was performed in the non-probability change and short-time gaming state , It is designed to shift to a non-probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. Is arranged. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

  The cover member 43 is provided to form the second big prize opening 37 and is attached below the first big prize opening 36. The cover member 43 forms a second big prize opening 37 by opening a part of its upper end surface. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the second big prize opening 37. Further, a guide piece 43 a for guiding the game ball toward the second big prize opening 37 is provided at the front edge of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second big prize opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B through the second big prize opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is disposed so as to cover the second grand prize opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

  The LED unit 5 informs the player of each gaming state and the lottery result. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2 has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the normal transition to the big hit gaming state is confirmed. Lights (or flashes) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as “SP character”) appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a part when the special symbol changes in the gaming state or in the big hit gaming state. It is like that.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory when the game ball wins the passing gate 35. The lottery result for “game” is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be turned on in red and blue, for example. In the normal symbol game, the LED lamp 511 is lit in red when winning, while it is lit in blue when lost in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is allowed. In addition, other lighting modes may be used as the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of winning, and the lighting state in the case of losing. It may be.

  In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing a variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524. In this case, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display that has been put on hold for performing the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the number of holdings is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on, and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holds is “4”, all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are lit.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game” and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 32, and the first The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 33, and the second The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize identification information display means.

  The variation display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED and the like, and each segment individually turning on and off. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the second special symbol are different from each other. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, such as “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2” indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state can be made after the jackpot gaming state ends. There are a nominal jackpot symbol and a nominal jackpot symbol such as “time-short 1” and “time-short-2” indicating that the jackpot game state is indeterminate and shifts to the short-time game state (see FIG. 8). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, such as “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 10” indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state can be made after the jackpot gaming state ends. There is a nominal big hit symbol and a nominal small hit symbol such as “small hit” that triggers the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 8). In other words, the winning symbol of the first special symbol does not have a small winning symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state, and the winning symbol of the second special symbol must shift to the short-time gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. There is no jackpot symbol to show. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. When the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next special symbol game is displayed. The number of times the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the screen can be executed (the number of hold) is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564. When the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Or, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the second starting port 33, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game after the next time. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (the number of suspensions) is displayed. Each of the 1st special symbol reservation display part 55 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display part 56 is arranged side by side up and down, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display part 52. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are moved to the first start port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended The symbol variation display is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second special symbol display unit 54. 2 The number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball at the start port 33 is four at the maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. 6) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the four first special symbol games that are held is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which is stored as the start storage. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( 0) is stored as a start memory, and the information of the second special symbol game for four times held is stored as a start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Remembered. Accordingly, the total number of winning holds in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 The winning suspension to the first starting port 32 and the winning suspension to the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display section 59 is lit while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of rounds is 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 12 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “12R”), the LED lamp 592 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 11 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “11R”), the LED lamp 593 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned off. Note that the number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may indicate the number of orders indicating the order in which round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16R”, “12th round”, “12R”, etc., and when the latter is meant, for example, “16th round”, “12th round” And so on. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged at the approximate center so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of winning lottery based on winning of game balls to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images relating to the game, for example, an identification pattern for performance, an effect image in the normal game state, an effect in the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the variation of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute effect production means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect execution means are also used as notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 includes a specific gaming state transition determination unit (a first specific gaming state transition determination unit and a second specific gaming state transition determination unit), a specific gaming state control unit, and a special gaming state control unit. , And round game execution means (first round game execution means and second round game execution means).

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start port switch 320 disposed behind the first start port 32. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 receive a predetermined detection signal as a winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. This is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected with a pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate 35. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it do.

  The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. Thereby, the pass gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning port left switch 400A and a general winning port right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning port 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first grand prize winning port count switch 360 disposed in the back of the first big prize winning port 36. The first grand prize opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first big prize opening 36. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the first big winning port count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the lower plate 17 or lower Dispensing to the plate 18.

  Connected to the main control circuit 60 is a second grand prize winning count switch 370 disposed behind the second big prize winning opening 37. The second grand prize opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the second big prize opening 37. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the second big winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21, and the upper plate 17 Alternatively, payout to the lower plate 18 is performed.

  The first grand prize port count switch 360 and the second grand prize port count switch 370 mainly control predetermined detection signals when a game ball passes through the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37. Supply to circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that V is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a non-V winning is made when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A for driving the first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36, and a second big prize opening shutter for opening and closing the second big prize opening 37. The second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving 37A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. In a situation where the first grand prize opening 36 is at least closed, the second big prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second big prize opening 37, and the game ball is awarded. Is driven into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 by the first big prize opening shutter 36A and the second big prize opening shutter 37A is performed by the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the unit 54 and is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 51 in the predetermined light emission mode, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second start port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in a gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state (“non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state” in this embodiment) is 0/257, and the blade member 34 Will never be released. On the other hand, the normal symbol hit probability in the high probability state (time-short game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. Further, the number of normal symbols that become a winning symbol in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second start port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

  The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. As a result, when the round game, which will be described later, is being executed in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A or difficult, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 when the game ball is detected by the first start port 320 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. The first one based on the winning of a game ball at the first start port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 The number of the special symbol variable display execution (start) is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol hold display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 330, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 The second based on the winning of a game ball at the second start port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of suspension (execution) of the special symbol variation display (ie, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol) is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning.

  In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of suspensions in which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 places the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 in the upper limit. When the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of the variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each. (That is, up to 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to four holding numbers is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 63. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol are displayed. The number of hold displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display section 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the first big prize opening 36 by the first big prize opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the first big prize opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, ten winning numbers). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as a predetermined later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big prize opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first big prize opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first big prize opening 36. Is done.

  Similarly, in the opened state of the second big prize opening 37 by the second big prize opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second big prize opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, ten winning numbers). Or until a later-described opening time specified in advance is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big prize opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second big prize opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second big prize opening 37. Is done.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the first big winning port 36 and the second big winning port 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 is in an open state and a closed state for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a big prize opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called “round game”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first grand prize port 36 or the second grand prize port 37 is closed by one round game, the first grand prize port 36 or the second grand prize port 37 is opened as the next round game. These states are also referred to as “inter-round game”, “inter-round interval”, or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 may be opened and closed several times. In one round game, the opening / closing states of the first grand prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big prize opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big prize opening is continuously closed.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from that of the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game. In the small hit gaming state of the present embodiment, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be opened only once. ing. Of course, in the small hit gaming state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state that shifts when a small hit is made by special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the small hit win is made and the game state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probability changing gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit win is made in the probability variation gaming state and a transition is made to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability change gaming state before the transition to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with respect to “round” with numbers such as 1 round or 1st round, for example, 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc., simply “R In a single round game, before the first grand prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached. When it has been reached, the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37 are closed, and the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37 are not opened for the remaining number of times of opening. The round game is ended.

  In a specific round game in which the second big prize opening 37 is opened in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. Thus, the specific area 38A is in an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in the big hit game state. In other words, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and become a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball is temporarily won in the second big prize opening 37. Even if it does, it will be in the state where a game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A, or is difficult. That is, the types of jackpot game state (specific game state) include a jackpot game state including a specific round game (first specific game state) and a jackpot game state not including a specific round game (second specific game state). There is.

  In the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made up of numbers, except for specific cases, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to know that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to “big hit” that can be obtained by many balls. When the display is stopped, the combination of effect decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a plurality of symbol rows) In addition, an effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The main CPU 61 included in the main control circuit 60 is in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first starting area (first starting port 32). It functions as a first specific gaming state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second starting area (second starting port 33). It functions as a second specific gaming state transition determination means.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 controls the gaming state to the specific gaming state on the condition that the first or second specific gaming state transition determination unit obtains a determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state. Function as.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 determines that the specific game state transition determination unit shifts to the specific game state after the specific game state is completed on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state. It functions as a special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (probability game state) that is relatively easy to obtain.

  Further, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (first big prize opening shutter 36A) to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state (round game). It functions as a first round game execution means for executing a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the first round game execution means can perform control to change the first variable winning device to the first mode and the second mode multiple times during execution of at least one round game. .

  Further, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, makes the second variable winning device (second big prize opening shutter 37A) change to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) (round game). It functions as a second round game execution means for executing a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as a second round game execution means is a first round game mode in which it is relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the specific area 38A through the second variable winning device during execution of at least one round game. It is possible to perform control that varies between the first mode and the second mode, and during the execution of at least one other round game, the second variable prize winning device is relatively passed through the specific area 38A. It is possible to perform control to vary the first mode and the second mode in the second round game mode that is difficult to perform.

  In the big hit game state, the round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means, and the easy-to-pass round game is executed by the second round game execution means according to the first round execution pattern, while the round game is predetermined. The first specific game state that is executed a number of times, and the round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means, and the easy-to-pass round game is different from the first round execution pattern by the second round game execution means. A second specific game state in which a round game is executed a predetermined number of times while being executed according to a round execution pattern, and a round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means, and an easy-to-pass round by the second round game execution means The game is the first round execution pattern and the second round Being performed in accordance with the third round execution pattern different from the row pattern, round game is realized a specific game state (win sorting specific game state) containing a third specific game state that is executed a predetermined number of times.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, including the functions of each means of the main CPU 61 described above.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal plate 80. .

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall, or a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a pass gate switch 350, a first big prize port count switch 360, and a second big prize port count switch 370. , A specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning opening left switch 400A, a general winning opening right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation of the hall manager.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal for requesting lending of game balls in accordance with a player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40, the first big winning opening 36, or the second Ten game balls are paid out as the number of winning balls per winning prize in the big winning opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power, and the game ball is controlled to be launched toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed in response to an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and is configured to be supplied with commands from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. A circuit 76, a sound control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79; The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down button switch 90A provided on the push-down button 9A and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes a display control means, a prior notification means, a scheduled provision quantity determination means, a notification quantity change means, and an effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 implement storage means.

  The liquid crystal display device 4 displays at least a part of the number of round games executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means in the prize distribution specific game state, while displaying a round number notification image (the number of rounds described later). Function as a display means that can be displayed. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

  The sub CPU 71 executes the prize distribution specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means (a round game for changing the first big prize opening 36 to an open mode and a closed mode is executed a plurality of times, and the second big prize port 37 is opened. Before the easy round game is executed by the second round game execution means, on the condition that it is decided to shift to the big hit game state in which the round game changing to the mode and the closed mode is executed a plurality of times It functions as a prior notification means capable of executing prior notification for notifying that the easy-to-pass round game is executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution time of the prior notification by the prior notification unit.

  Further, the program ROM 72 changes the display mode change pattern (display color) of a round number notification image (an icon indicating the number of rounds described later) until the notification round game is executed for each number of rounds in which the notification round game is executed. Function as storage means for storing image display mode change pattern information (icon change lottery table to be described later).

  The sub CPU 71 determines the number of substantial round games (a round game that makes it easy to win the first big prize opening 36) executed by the first round game execution means (main CPU 61) in the prize distribution specific game state, The upper limit number of game media accepted (first upper prize number) to the first variable prize device (first big prize opening 36) defined for the number of times of a real round game, and the game medium to the first variable prize device The number of game values (game balls) given by the game value granting means (payout device 83) per number received (winning number) and the second round game execution means (main CPU 61) The number of real round games to be executed (round game that makes it easy to win the second big prize opening 37) and the second variable defined for the number of real round games one time The game value given by the game value granting means for the upper limit number of game media accepted to the prize device (second big prize opening 37) and the number of game media accepted to the second variable prize device. It functions as a scheduled grant quantity determining means for determining the scheduled grant quantity of the game value based on the given grant number.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as an informing unit capable of informing a part of the scheduled amount determined by the scheduled amount determining unit, and the sub CPU 71 determines the amount notified by the notifying unit as a schedule. It functions as a notification quantity changing means that can be changed within the range of the scheduled assigned quantity determined by the assigned quantity determining means.

  The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means that can select an effect pattern according to the type of the specific game state (big hit game state). The liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means, it functions as an effect execution means capable of executing an effect in the specific gaming state.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, the display control circuit 76 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for performing control related to sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that performs control related to sound, a sound data ROM that stores various sound data, a sound signal, and the like. An amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the signal is included. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. In response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71, the sound source IC is used to select one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (oscillates) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. Etc.) may be controlled.

[Game state and production mode of gaming machine]
Next, the gaming state and effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a normal mode, a special mode, a time reduction mode, and an ST mode are implemented as performance modes in the normal gaming state. In the short-time mode, as a production, the short-time mode that impresses that the short-time mode has a relatively small number of games (the number of special symbol fluctuations, that is, the number of special symbol games) and the short-time mode are relatively many. There is a long mode that impresses you that it will be the number of games. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is equipped with a super big bonus, a challenge bonus, an extra bonus, and a V challenge as an effect mode in the big hit gaming state. The challenge bonus includes a single game, a three-time challenge, and a surprise.

  The normal mode is an effect mode of non-probable and non-time-saving gaming state. In the normal mode, for example, when 10 special symbol games are consumed as the number of games in the special mode, the special mode shifts from the special mode, and an impression with an impression different from the special mode is performed. In the normal mode, when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “3” or “7”, the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. In the normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”, the effect mode shifts to the challenge bonus. In the normal mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols “3” and “7” corresponds to the big hit symbol corresponding to “probability 1” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed together with these big hit symbols. The Further, in the normal mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbols “1”, “2”, “4” to “6” is any one of “probability 2”, “time reduction 1”, and “time reduction 2” of the first special symbol. Corresponding to the big hit symbol corresponding to the crab, and stop display with these big hit symbols.

  The special mode is the same as the normal mode internally, and is a non-probable and non-short game state effect mode. In the special mode, for example, when 10 special symbol games are consumed, the mode is changed to the normal mode. In the special mode, for example, when 4 or 100 special symbol games are consumed in the short time mode, the special mode game is shifted from the short time mode, and in the ST mode, for example, the special symbol game is 190 times. When the is digested, the mode is shifted from the ST mode, and an impression of an impression different from the time reduction mode or the ST mode is performed. Also in this special mode, as in the normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “3” or “7”, the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. In the special mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”, the effect mode shifts to the challenge bonus. The relationship between the combination pattern of the decorative symbols “1” to “7” in the special mode and the special symbol is the same as in the normal mode.

  The short-time mode is an effect mode that is uncertain and short-time gaming state. In the time-saving mode, regardless of whether the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state, the jackpot symbol corresponding to “time saving 1” of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. The game is executed after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol of “Time 1” is finished, and is given, for example, 100 times as the number of games, so that the game is basically continued until 100 special symbol games are consumed. . In the short-time mode, when the big win symbol corresponding to the first special symbol “Time-short 2” is stopped and displayed in the normal game state of the short-time gaming state, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the “short time 2” big hit symbol is displayed. The game is executed after the completion, and is given 100 times as the number of games in the same manner as described above, so that the game is basically continued until 100 special symbol games are consumed. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, in the normal game state of the non-time-saving game state, when the big hit symbol corresponding to the first special symbol “time short 2” is stopped and displayed, the big hit game corresponding to this “short time 2” big hit symbol Although executed after the end of the state, the number of games is given only four times, and is basically continued until four special symbol games are consumed. Such a time saving mode is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state when a non-V winning is finally achieved in the big hit gaming state. In FIG. 8, for the sake of convenience, the transition from the big bonus gaming state challenge bonus to the non-V winning mode is shown as a condition, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the production mode of, for example, a super big bonus, an extra bonus, or a V challenge, the mode is shifted to the short time mode if the condition for non-V winning is satisfied.

  In the time reduction mode, when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “3” or “7”, the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. Further, when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6” in the time reduction mode, the effect mode shifts to an extra bonus. Furthermore, when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol different from “1” to “7” in the time reduction mode, the presentation mode shifts to the V challenge. In the time-saving mode, the combination of the decorative symbols “3” and “7” corresponds to the big hit symbol corresponding to the “probable change 1” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed together with these big hit symbols. The In the time-saving mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbols “1”, “2”, “4” to “6” is a jackpot corresponding to any of “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 9” of the second special symbol. Corresponding to the symbols, these jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the short-time mode, the specific symbol as the decorative symbol corresponds to the big hit symbol corresponding to “probability 10” of the second special symbol and the small bonus symbol of the second special symbol, and stops together with these hit symbols. Is displayed. Such a short-time mode is a mode in which, when the big win symbol or the small win symbol is not stopped and displayed, when the special symbol game of 4 times or 100 times given as the number of games is consumed, the mode is shifted to the special mode. Become.

  The short mode of the short time mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be given is four times, and even when the number of games is 100 times, the first time is the first time To be executed. The long mode of the short-time mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games given is 100. When the number of games is, for example, the fourth time or more from the start of the short-time mode, the short mode May be executed with a production mode that gives an impression of promotion.

  The ST mode is a production mode with a promising and short-time gaming state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the gaming state to the probable gaming state (ST gaming state) after the end of the big win gaming state that has finally won a V prize. It is what is done. The ST mode is basically continued until 190 special symbol games are consumed by giving 190 times as the number of games, for example.

  The case where the decorative symbols “1” to “7” and the specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the ST mode is the same as in the time reduction mode. That is, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “3” or “7”, the effect mode shifts to the super big bonus. Further, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as any combination of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”, the effect mode shifts to an extra bonus. Further, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the specific symbol, the effect mode shifts to the V challenge. The relationship between the decorative design and the special design in the ST mode is the same as in the time reduction mode.

  The super big bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with a jackpot gaming state of 16R so-called full open and executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot gaming state. The 16R full open jackpot gaming state is a gaming state controlled so that a winning pattern 1 is generated as a bonus winning opening / closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a 16R full-open big hit gaming state, when there is a V prize, the production mode shifts from the super big bonus to the ST mode. Although not specifically shown in FIG. 8, in the 16R full open big hit game state, there is a possibility that there is no V-winning in the end. In such a case, the production mode is changed from the super big bonus to the time reduction mode. Will be migrated.

  The challenge bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the 12R jackpot game state and executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot game state. As the types of challenge bonuses, there are one-game, three-time challenge, and a surprise. In the first round (1R to 2R in this embodiment) in which the challenge bonus is executed, the player performs a pressing operation. By operating the button 9A or the jog dial 9B, it is possible to select any one of a single game, a challenge three times, and a surprise. In a single game, a three-time challenge, and a surprise, predetermined presentation contents different from each other are executed. The 12R big hit game state is a game state that is controlled so that one of the win patterns 2 and 3 is generated as a big prize opening / closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a 12R jackpot gaming state, when there is a V prize, the effect mode shifts from the challenge bonus to the ST mode. On the other hand, in the 12R jackpot gaming state, when there is no final V prize, the effect mode shifts from the challenge bonus to the time reduction mode.

  The extra bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the 11R or 16R jackpot game state and is executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot game state. The 11R or 16R big hit gaming state is a gaming state controlled so that any one of the winning patterns 4 to 11 occurs as a special winning opening / closing pattern to be described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such 11R or 16R big hit gaming state, when there is a V prize, the effect mode shifts from the extra bonus to the ST mode. Although not specifically shown in FIG. 8, there is a possibility that in the 11R or 16R big hit game state, there is a possibility that there is no V-winning in the end. In such a case, the effect mode shifts from the extra bonus to the short-time mode. Will be.

  The V challenge is a round in which a V prize can be easily obtained as a round that can be awarded to the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 (a round game that makes it easy to win the second big prize opening 37). Is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the 11R big hit gaming state (also referred to as “clash V”) or only the small hit gaming state. The big hit game state of the bump V is a game state that is controlled so that a hit pattern 12 is generated as a big prize opening / closing pattern described later, and the small hit game state is a hit pattern 13 as a big prize opening / closing pattern described later. The gaming state is controlled to occur (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a big hit game state of a collision V, when there is a V prize, the effect mode shifts from the V challenge to the ST mode. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 8, there may be a case where there is no final V winning in the big hit game state of the collision V. In such a case, the presentation mode shifts from the V challenge to the short time mode. . In the small hit game state, the V challenge is executed as the production mode. On the other hand, when the small hit game state ends regardless of the V prize, the production mode basically includes the production before the V challenge is executed. It will shift to the mode.

  In the non-short-time gaming state, the second special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and when the game shifts to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state accordingly, or in the short-time gaming state, the first special symbol becomes a big hit symbol. In response to this, when transitioning to the big hit gaming state, an effect mode corresponding to those winning symbols is executed. Therefore, there is a case where the normal mode or the special mode is shifted to the extra bonus or the V challenge, and the ST mode is shifted to the super big bonus or the challenge bonus.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, the hit probability of a special symbol including a small hit probability, which will be described later, is 1 / 239.18 (274/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state). At the time of high probability (probability game state), it is 1 / 81.92 (800/65536). The small hit probability of being in the small hit gaming state is 0 for the first special symbol and is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) for the second special symbol. The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to a maximum of 190 times as the number of games (the number of variations of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probable variation 1” and the second special symbol jackpot symbol “probable variation 1”, the winning opening opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is the winning pattern 1, and the round game round number is 16R ( Of these, 16R) is assigned to the big winning opening, and the super big bonus is executed as the effect mode in the big hit gaming state, and the content of the effect is “16R bonus”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 1” as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 5/100, and the probability (inrush rate) of “probability 1” as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is 10/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 2, and the round number 12R (of which the actual round number is 10R) is given, the challenge bonus is executed as the production mode, "Success". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “probability 2” of the first special symbol is set to 25/100.

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “time-short 1” and “time-short 2”, it becomes a winning pattern 3, 12R rounds (of which 10R is real round) is given, challenge bonus is executed as the production mode, Is “challenge bonus 12R failure”. The rush rate of the jackpot symbol “hour / short 1” of the first special symbol is set to 25/100, and the rush rate of the jackpot symbol “hour / hour 2” of the first special symbol is set to 45/100.

  The big special symbols “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 9” of the second special symbol are hit patterns 4 to 11. Among them, in the big special symbol “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 4” of the second special symbol, the round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 15R) is given, an extra bonus is executed as the production mode, “Addition bonus 15R”, “Recovery after additional bonus 4R → 15R”, “Recovery after additional bonus 8R → 15R”. The rush rates of the jackpot symbols “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 4” of the second special symbol are set to 8/100, 1/100, and 1/100, respectively.

  In the big special symbols “probability variation 5” to “probability variation 9” of the second special symbol, the number of rounds is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 12R), the number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 10R), and the number of rounds is 11R (of which the actual number of rounds is 8R) ), 11R rounds (of which 6R are real rounds) and 11R rounds (of which 4R are real rounds) are given, and the bonus is executed as the production mode. “Bonus 10R”, “Addition bonus 8R”, “Addition bonus 6R”, and “Addition bonus 4R”. The rush rates of the big hit symbols “probability variation 5” to “probability variation 9” of the second special symbol are set to 4/100, 11/100, 30/100, 5/100, and 20/100, respectively.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 10”, the winning pattern is 12 and the round number 11R (of which the actual round number is 1R) is given, the V challenge is executed as the production mode, and the content of the production is “V challenge successful. " The rush rate of the big hit symbol “probability change 10” of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small special symbol of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 13, the V challenge is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “V challenge failure”. The entry rate of the small special symbol of the second special symbol is set to 1/1. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state does not have the concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The number of winning prizes is set to count up to 10 for both the first winning prize opening 36 and the second winning prize opening 37 as the upper limit winning number per round. The short-time performance (specification of the short-time gaming state) is set so that the short-time gaming state continues for a maximum of 100 times or 4 times in a high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state) or in a non-probability variation gaming state. . The number of winning balls is 3 per winning prize at the starting opening (first starting opening 32 and second starting opening 33), 10 per winning prize at the general winning opening 40, and the large winning opening (first The number is set to 10 per winning prize to the big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37). The normal symbol hit probability is set to 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of symbols per normal symbol is set to one. The winning count when the second start port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to I are defined as one round opening / closing patterns (one round opening / closing patterns) for the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37. The opening / closing patterns A to H are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern I is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. Note that the opening / closing pattern I in the small hit gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown together with other opening / closing patterns A to H for convenience. The first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are simply referred to as a big prize opening unless it is particularly necessary to distinguish them. The open / close patterns A to I shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and specific times for defining the open / close patterns may be other than those illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 27.222 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other open / close patterns B to H, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section in which the open state is 27.222s is a long open in which the open state of the big prize opening is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 27.222s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 2.898 s, and then the open state continues again for 27.222 s. The section in which the open state is 0.102 s is a short open in which the open state of the big prize opening is relatively short. That is, the open / close pattern B is a pattern in which a short open occurs once, then a closed state occurs once and a long open occurs once, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 27.324 s. In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win a game ball in the grand prize opening. On the other hand, in the open state where the long is open, it is possible and easy to win the game ball in the big winning opening. ing. Such short-circuit opening is the same not only in the opening / closing pattern B but also in the opening / closing patterns C and E to H described later.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the open / close pattern B is a pattern in which a short circuit is opened only once, and the total open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.102 s.

  In the open / close pattern D, a series of open / close cycles in which the closed state is 1.002 s after the open state is 2.202 s and then the closed state is 1.002 s after the open state is 2.802 s are repeated five times. This is an open / close pattern that occurs and then finally the open state becomes 2.202 s. In the section where the open state is 2.202 s or 2.802 s, the opening time of the big prize opening is longer than the short opening and shorter than the long opening, and becomes a middle opening different from both the short opening and the long opening. . That is, in the opening / closing pattern D, middle opening repeatedly occurs 11 times, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 27.222 s. In the open state where the middle is opened, it is possible to win a game ball in the big winning opening. Such middle opening is the same not only in the opening / closing pattern D but also in the opening / closing pattern E described later.

  In the open / close pattern E, the open state and the closed state are repeatedly generated 6 times with 0.102 s and 1.200 s, respectively, and then the above-described series of open / close cycles are repeatedly generated 5 times in the same manner as the open / close pattern D described above. Finally, an open / close pattern in which the open state is 2.202 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern E, short opening is repeated 6 times and then middle opening is repeated 11 times. The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern E is 27.834 s.

  The open / close pattern F is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 1.200 s, and then the open state is 0.102 s. That is, the open / close pattern F is a pattern in which short-circuit opening is repeated twice, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern F is 0.204 s.

  The open / close pattern G has an open state of 0.102 s first, then a closed state of 1.200 s, then an open state of 0.102 s, and then a closed state of 1.200 s, and finally an open state. Is an open / close pattern with 0.102 s. That is, the open / close pattern G is a pattern in which the short circuit opening is repeated only three times, and the total opening time of the open / close pattern G is 0.306 s.

  The opening / closing pattern H is defined as the same opening / closing pattern as the opening / closing pattern C. That is, the open / close pattern H is a pattern in which a short open is generated only once, and the total open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.102 s. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern C and the opening / closing pattern H that are the same as each other are defined so as to be distinguished from each other, but one opening / closing pattern may be defined collectively without distinction.

  The open / close pattern I is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only 1.5 s. The section where the open state is 1.5 s is middle open. That is, the opening / closing pattern I is one in which middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern I is 1.5 s.

  In the real round game in the big hit game state, when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A, B, D, E including the long opening or middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the opening / closing patterns A to I described above. This is a round game. The round game when the open / close control is performed based on the remaining open / close patterns C and F to I is a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the second big prize opening 37 regardless of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) of the displacement member 39 is, as a general rule, after the operation period in which the specific region 38A is opened is initially 0.102 s, and then the specific region 38A is closed. The non-operation period is 2.898 s, and after that, the operation period is defined as an operation pattern that continues for a maximum of 29.222 s. The total operation time of the displacement member operation pattern is 32.222 s. During the operation period of 0.102 s, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short, so it is very difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, in the operation period that is 29.222 s at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that V winning in the specific area 38A is relatively easy. For the operation period of the maximum 29.222 s, in the first round in which the second big prize opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, the second big prize opening 37 is closed by reaching the upper prize number. When a predetermined monitoring processing time relating to a residual sphere described later is passed, the displacement member 39 is inoperative and the specific area 38A is in a closed state even before the predetermined maximum length of 29.222s has elapsed. May be.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (per pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 13 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). The winning pattern 1 occurs at the time of the super big bonus, and is defined as the number of rounds that are defined for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as “specified number of rounds”) and the long opening that allows winning to the big winning opening. The actual number of rounds defined only for rounds including at least the middle release is a hit pattern defined as 16R. In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval in which the grand prize opening is closed in the first round until the grand prize opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the time for closing (closing time) is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which 102 ms is set are defined. In the winning pattern 1, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern A in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths, and the 2Rth to 10Rth and 12R The first big winning opening 36 is defined to be an opening / closing pattern A in all of the eyes from the 16th to 16R. That is, the winning pattern 1 is 16 rounds in which the number of actual rounds is equal to the specified number of rounds, and both the 1R and 11R rounds are executed as easy V winnings in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 2 is a winning pattern that occurs at the time of the challenge bonus, and is specified with a specified number of rounds of 12R, of which the actual number of rounds is 10R. In the winning pattern 2, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern a, the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern H and the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1Rth and 11Rth, and the 2Rth to 10Rth and 12R It is defined that the first big winning opening 36 is an opening / closing pattern A and an opening / closing pattern C. That is, the winning pattern 2 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 10 rounds from 2R to 11R, and only the 11R round is an easy V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs at the time of the challenge bonus, and is defined as a specified number of rounds of 12R, of which the actual number of rounds is 10R. In the winning pattern 3, only the interval between the rounds between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between the rounds is the interval pattern a. Both the 1R and 11R second winning prizes It is defined that the opening 37 is an opening / closing pattern H, and that the first big winning opening 36 is an opening / closing pattern A in all of the 2R to 10R and 12R. That is, the winning pattern 3 is executed as 10 rounds of 2R, 10R, and 12R, and the 1R and 11R are executed as rounds in which V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult. The

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and is specified with a prescribed number of rounds of 16R and a substantial number of rounds of 15R. In the winning pattern 4, only the interval between rounds between the 10Rth and 11Rths is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths 37 is an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is defined to be an opening / closing pattern D in all of the 2Rth to 10Rth and the 12th to 16thR. That is, the winning pattern 4 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 15 rounds of 1R to 10R and 12R to 16R, and V winning in the specific area 38A is easy only for the 1R round.

  The winning pattern 5 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and is specified with a prescribed number of rounds of 16R and a substantial number of rounds of 15R. In the winning pattern 5, only the interval between rounds between the 10Rth and 11Rths is the interval pattern b, and the interval between the other rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths 37 is an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and the first grand prize winning opening 36 is an opening / closing pattern E in the 5Rth, and the 2nd to 4Rth, 6Rth to 10Rth, and 12Rth to 16Rth are the first. It is defined that the one big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern D. That is, the winning pattern 5 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 15 rounds of 1R to 10R and 12R to 16R, and only the 1R round is easy for V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 6 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and is specified with a prescribed number of rounds of 16R and a substantial number of rounds of 15R. In the winning pattern 6, only the interval between rounds between the 10Rth and 11Rths is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths 37 is an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is the opening / closing pattern E at the 9th eye, and the first big prize is given at the 2R to 8R eyes, the 10R eyes, and the 12R eyes to the 16R eyes. The mouth 36 is defined to be an opening / closing pattern D. That is, the winning pattern 6 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 15 rounds of 1R to 10R and 12R to 16R, and only the 1R round is easy for V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 7 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus is added, and is specified with a specified number of rounds of 16R and of which the actual number of rounds is 12R. In the winning pattern 7, only the interval between rounds between the 10Rth and 11Rths is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths 37 is an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize winning opening 36 is the opening / closing pattern F in the 14th to 16th eyes, and the first big winning prize is in the 2nd to 10th eyes and the 12th to 13th eyes. The mouth 36 is defined to be an opening / closing pattern D. That is, the winning pattern 7 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 12 rounds of 1R to 10R and 12R to 13R, and only the 1R round is easy for V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 8 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and is specified with a specified number of rounds of 11R and a substantial number of rounds of 10R. In the winning pattern 8, only the interval between rounds between the 10Rth and 11Rths is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths 37 is defined as the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern D in the 2nd to 10th eyes. That is, the winning pattern 8 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 10 rounds from 1R to 10R, and only the 1R round is easy to win V in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 9 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and is specified with 11R as the specified number of rounds and 8R as the actual number of rounds. In the winning pattern 9, only the interval between the rounds between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between the rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1R and 11R 37 is defined as the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern D and the opening / closing pattern G in the 2R to 8R and 9R to 10R. That is, the winning pattern 9 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 8 rounds from 1R to 8R, and only the 1R round can easily make a V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 10 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and is specified with a specified number of rounds of 11R and a substantial number of rounds of 6R. In the winning pattern 10, only the interval between rounds between the 10Rth and 11Rths is the interval pattern b, and the interval between the other rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1Rth and 11Rths 37 is an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is an opening / closing pattern D, an opening / closing pattern F, and an opening / closing pattern in the 2R to 6R, 7R to 8R, and 9R to 10R. C is specified. That is, the winning pattern 10 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 6 rounds from 1R to 6R, and only the 1R round is an easy V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 11 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is added, and has a specified number of rounds of 11R, of which the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the winning pattern 11, only the interval between rounds between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between rounds is the interval pattern a. 37 is an opening / closing pattern B and an opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is defined to be an opening / closing pattern D and an opening / closing pattern C in the 2R to 4R and 5R to 10R. That is, the winning pattern 11 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 4 rounds of 1R to 4R, and only the 1R round is easy to win V in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 12 is a winning pattern that occurs upon a V-challenge in the big hit gaming state, and is specified with a specified number of rounds of 11R and a substantial number of rounds of 1R. In the winning pattern 12, only the interval between rounds between the 10R and 11R is the interval pattern b, and the other interval between the rounds is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize opening in each of the 1R and 11R 37 is defined as the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern H, and the first big prize opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern C in the 2nd to 10th eyes. In other words, the winning pattern 12 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is only the 1R-th round, and only the 1R-th round is easy for V winning in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 13 is generated in the case of a V challenge in the small hit gaming state, and is defined so that the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern I only once. That is, in the winning pattern 13, there is a possibility that a game ball may win the second large winning opening 37 and there may be a V win in the specific area 38A. Are executed as those that cannot be changed to the probability variation gaming state.

[Operation timing in Super Big Bonus (Pattern 1 per hit)]
Next, the operation timing in the super big bonus (hit pattern 1) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown by way of example in FIG. 12, at the 1R of the super big bonus (hit pattern 1), the displacement member is activated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By operating 39, the specific area 38A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 37. Specifically, in the 1R, after the second big prize opening 37 ends the long open (section where the open state is 27.222 s) and is in the closed state, the second big prize opening 37 starts from the second big prize opening 37. When a predetermined monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining ball remaining in the ball passage leading to the winning port count switch 370 has elapsed, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, The specific area 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 28.320s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In addition, in this 1R, there is a case where the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is not detected by the specific area switch 380A while the second large winning opening 37 is long open. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4 does not particularly perform a warning display for prompting a V winning in the specific area 38A.

  On the other hand, in the 11th super big bonus (winning pattern 1), the displacement member 39 is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. The specific area 38 </ b> A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 37. However, also in the 11th round, when the second big prize opening 37 ends the long opening (section in which the open state is 27.222 s) and becomes the closed state, the displacement member 39 is passed after the predetermined monitoring processing time described above. Is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, whereby the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 25.320s shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In addition, in this 11R, for example, 13 s after the second big prize opening 37 becomes long open, that is, 10 s elapses after the specific region 38A becomes open according to the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern. However, if the V-winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is not detected by the specific area switch 380A, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display that prompts the V-winning to the specific area 38A. If a V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of such warning display, the execution of the warning display ends. Even when the second big prize opening 37 is closed and the 11R-th is finished without detecting the V prize by the specific area switch 380A, the execution of the warning display is finished.

[Operation timing for Challenge Bonus (Hit Pattern 2)]
Next, the operation timing in the challenge bonus (winning pattern 2) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 13, in the 1R of the challenge bonus (winning pattern 2), as in the case of the 1R of the super big bonus (winning pattern 1) shown in FIG. The specific region 38A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with opening and closing. In the first round of the challenge bonus (winning pattern 2), for example, 10s after the second big prize opening 37 becomes long open, that is, the specific area 38A becomes open according to the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern. If the specific area switch 380A does not detect the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A even after 10 seconds elapses, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display for prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. If a V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of such warning display, the execution of the warning display ends. Note that even when the second big prize opening 37 is closed and the first round is finished without detecting the V prize by the specific area switch 380A, the execution of the warning display is finished.

  On the other hand, in the 11R of the challenge bonus (winning pattern 2), the second big prize opening 37 is only one short opening (open state is 0.102 s). With the start of the open state 37, the displacement member 39 operates based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. As a result, the specific area 38 </ b> A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 37. However, in the 11th round, when the second big prize opening 37 finishes the short opening and becomes the closed state, the 11th round is finished. Therefore, the control using the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. finish. Therefore, when the eleventh R is finished, the displacement member 39 does not enter the operating state for the longest operating period, and the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state by being controlled to the non-operating state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed only after an open state of about 0.102 s defined as a short operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In the 11R of such a challenge bonus (winning pattern 2), a warning display that prompts a V winning in the specific area 38A is not executed.

[Operation timing for extra bonus (per-attack pattern 8)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation timing in the extra bonus (hit pattern 8) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 14 as an example, in the 1R of the extra bonus (hit pattern 8), the second big prize opening 37 is only opened once (open state is 0.102 s). With the start of the open state of the second big prize opening 37, the displacement member 39 is operated based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. As a result, the specific area 38 </ b> A is in an open state and a closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 37. However, in the 1R, when the second big prize opening 37 finishes the short opening and is in the closed state, the 1R eye is finished. Therefore, the control using the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. finish. Therefore, when the 1R-th is finished, the displacement member 39 is not in the operating state for the longest operating period, and the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state by being controlled to the non-operating state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed only after an open state of about 0.102 s defined as a short operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In the 11R of such a challenge bonus (winning pattern 2), a warning display that prompts a V winning in the specific area 38A is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the 11R of the extra bonus (hit pattern 8), as in the case of the 1R of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2) shown in FIG. 38A will be in an open state and a closed state. In the 11th R of the extra bonus (winning pattern 8), for example, 10s after the second big prize opening 37 becomes long open, that is, the specific area 38A becomes open according to the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern. If the specific area switch 380A does not detect the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A even after 10 seconds elapses, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display for prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. Even if such a warning display is made, if the second prize winning opening 37 ends the long open and is closed without detecting the V prize by the specific area switch 380A, the warning display is executed. Will also end. Further, when a V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of the warning display, the execution of the warning display ends with this as a trigger. Note that the warning display may be terminated when the displacement member 39 is in an inoperative state.

[Operation timing in hit pattern 4 (from the end of 9R to the beginning of 12R)]
Next, the operation timing in the hit pattern 4 (from the 9R end to the 12R beginning) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15 as an example, when the 9Rth end is completed according to the hit pattern 4, the round state shifts to the round state A as an interval between rounds after the 9Rth end.

  When the round state A ends after a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of the interval pattern a), a transition is made to the round state B in which the 10th cycle is being executed. In the round state B, the first grand prize opening 36 repeats the middle opening (open state of 2.202s and 2.802) 11 times according to the opening / closing pattern D.

  When the last middle release of 11 times in the round state B ends, the round state B ends, and the round state transitions to the round state C as an interval between rounds after the 10th round ends.

  When the round state C ends after a predetermined closing time (0.102 s of the interval pattern b), the state shifts to the round state D in which the 11th R is being executed. In the round state D, the second big prize opening 37 is short-opened only once according to the open / close pattern H (open state of 0.102 s).

  When one short opening is completed in the round state D, the round state D is ended, and the round state shifts to the round state E as an interval between rounds after the 11th round ends.

  When the round state E ends after a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of the interval pattern a), a transition is made to the round state F in which the 12th R is being executed. In the round state F, the first big prize opening 36 repeats the middle opening again according to the opening / closing pattern D.

  According to such an operation according to the hit pattern 4, the open state of the second big prize opening 37 at the 11th R is simply one short opening, and the first big prize opening at the front and rear 10R and 12R is shown. Since it is extremely short compared to the middle opening which is an open state of 36, it is difficult to distinguish that the open / closed state of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 has been switched, and whether each round has been executed or not is determined. It is difficult to discriminate. This is also due to the fact that the closing time of the interval between rounds before execution of the 11th R (interval pattern b of 0.102 s) is shorter than the closing time of the interval between other rounds (interval pattern a of 1.2 s). .

  In addition, in the interval between rounds (round state C) and 11R (round state D) before execution of the 11th round, the effects at the end of the 10th round (round state B) are continuously executed. That is, it is difficult to recognize that a new effect is being executed even after the 10th to 11th transitions. The closing time of the game state E may be the same closing time as the game state C.

[Operation Timing by Hit Pattern 11 and Hit Pattern 5]
Next, the operation timings of the hit pattern 11 (from the 4R end to the end of the 11R) and the hit pattern 5 (from the 4R end to the 5R end) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 16, in the case of the hit pattern 11, after the first big prize opening 36 finishes the final open state (middle open of 2.202 s) according to the open / close pattern D at the 4th R, 5R From the first to the 10th R, the first grand prize opening 36 repeats the short opening of 0.102 s six times according to the opening / closing pattern C. After a predetermined closing time (0.102 s of interval pattern b) after the 10th eye is finished, the second big prize opening 37 becomes a short opening of 0.102 s according to the opening / closing pattern H as the 11th eye. .

  The liquid crystal display device 4 displays the following effect image from the end of the 4Rth to the end of the 11Rth of the hit pattern 11. That is, in the hit pattern 11, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that the bonus is being added until the 5R-th start from the 4R-end final stage. The liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect image indicating the end display pattern from the start of the 5R to the end of the 11R. Then, when the 11th eye is finished, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image showing a title pattern to be described later over a predetermined time. When the display of the effect image indicating the title pattern is finished, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect image indicating that the ST mode is being performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 as an example, in the case of the hit pattern 5, the first big winning opening 36 ends the last open state (middle open of 2.202 s) according to the open / close pattern D in the 4Rth, After a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of interval pattern a) from this end, as the 5th R, the first big winning opening 36 repeats the short opening of 0.102 s six times according to the opening / closing pattern E, Then, middle opening (open state of 2.202s and 2.802s) is repeated 11 times.

  From the 4R end to the 5R end of the hit pattern 5, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the following effect image. That is, in the hit pattern 5, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that the bonus is being added from the end of the 4R to the start of the 5R. The liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating the end display pattern while the first grand prize opening 36 repeats the short opening six times after the 5R-th start. Then, when the first grand prize winning opening 36 finishes the short opening and the middle opening starts, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image in which a special character (SP character) described later appears. When the display of the effect image in which the special character appears is finished, the liquid crystal display device 4 again displays the effect image indicating that the bonus is being added.

  According to such an operation according to the hit pattern 11, the 5R to 11R eyes are executed while the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed, the effect image of the title pattern is displayed after the end of the 11R eye, and then the big hit The effect image in the ST mode is displayed in the state where the gaming state is finished. On the other hand, according to the operation according to the hit pattern 5, the display of the effect image of the end display pattern is in the early stage of the 5R, so after the end of the 5R start (after repeating 6 shorts open) The effect image of the appearance of the special character is displayed on the screen, and then the effect image during the extra bonus is displayed again. Thereby, in the effect display at the time of execution of the hit pattern 5, a so-called “reverse effect” is realized.

  In addition, during the execution of the hit pattern 5, the effect display image of the end display pattern that is displayed in a pseudo manner is controlled to be displayed based on the display time that matches the time length of the 5R to 11R of the hit pattern 11. It has become. That is, the effect display image of the end display pattern in the hit pattern 5 includes a short opening time for 7 rounds, an interval time between rounds (interval pattern a), and an interval time between rounds (interval pattern a). The pattern b) is continuously displayed over the total 6.816s. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish the winning pattern 5 from the winning pattern 11 when the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the operation according to the hit pattern 5, only the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed at the beginning of the 5R, but the effect image of the title pattern is displayed together with the end display pattern. You may make it do. The effect image of the end display pattern has the same content in both the hit pattern 5 and the hit pattern 11, but the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 5 corresponds to the hit pattern 11. The content may be different from the content, for example, content that suggests that the bonus will continue. Further, it is possible to suggest that the additional bonus continues by changing the display timing of the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 5 and the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 11. Good.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. The table defines lottery value (random value) information for determining predetermined items based on lottery values (random numbers) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”.

<Challenge success / failure lottery table>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a challenge success / failure lottery table. The challenge success / failure lottery table is a table that is referred to in a challenge success / failure lottery process (S450 in FIG. 120) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The challenge success / failure lottery table has a challenge success / failure pattern No. as a decision item. 1 to 3 (No. 1: Challenge failure → Last chance failure, No. 2: Challenge failure → Last chance success, and No. 3: Challenge success), reference items “success” and “failure”, and reference items The lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the challenge success / failure pattern by random number lottery is defined. As an example, challenge success / failure pattern no. 1, the lottery value information corresponding to “success” is 0 (lottery rate 0), and the lottery value information corresponding to “failure” is 32768 (lottery rate 32768/32768). Challenge success / failure pattern No. 2, lottery value information corresponding to “success” is 8192 (lottery rate 8192/32768), and lottery value information corresponding to “failure” is 0 (lottery rate 0). Challenge success / failure pattern No. 3, the lottery value information corresponding to “success” is 24576 (lottery rate 24576/32768), and the lottery value information corresponding to “failure” is 0 (lottery rate 0). In the challenge success / failure lottery table, if the winning effect pattern flag, which will be described later, is “02H” (the internal flag corresponding to the winning pattern 2 when the big special symbol of the first special symbol is “probability 2”), it corresponds to “success” When the lottery value information to be referred is referred to and the winning effect pattern flag is “03H” (the internal flag corresponding to the winning pan 3 with the first special symbol having the big winning symbol “hour 1” or “hour 2”), “failure” The lottery value information corresponding to “” is referred to. The challenge success / failure pattern No. is determined by the challenge success / failure lottery table. When 1 to 3 are determined, challenge success / failure pattern flags “01H” to “03H” are set as the internal flags corresponding to each.

  According to such a challenge success / failure lottery table, the challenge success / failure pattern No. 1-3 are determined by lottery. For example, challenge success / failure pattern no. When 3 (successful challenge) is determined, an effect image that impresses “success” of the round execution that can be V-winned in the 3rd to 8th R of the big hit gaming state is displayed. The challenge success / failure pattern No. When 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) is determined, an effect image that impresses the “success” of the round execution that can be V-winned in the 10R game of the big hit gaming state is displayed. Furthermore, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) is determined, an effect image that impresses the “failure” of the round execution that can be V-winned in the 10R game of the big hit gaming state is displayed.

  The lottery value information corresponding to “success” in the challenge success / failure lottery table includes challenge success / failure pattern No. The lottery rate of No. 2 is a challenge success / failure pattern no. It may be defined to be higher than the lottery rate of 3, or may be defined to be the same lottery rate. As the lottery value information corresponding to “success”, the challenge success / failure pattern No. The lottery rate for 1 may be defined to be greater than 0. In other words, even when an effect image that gives an impression of “failure” of the round execution in which V winning can be performed is displayed, a round in which V winning can be performed may be executed.

<Single match combination lottery table>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a single-game combination lottery table. The single-game combination lottery table is a table referred to in the single-game combination lottery process (S460 in FIG. 121) in the single-game effect determining process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The single game combination lottery table is the No. 1-45 combination patterns and challenge success / failure patterns “1: Failure → Failed”, “2: Failure → Success”, and “3: Success”, and one match depending on the reference item It defines lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a combination pattern by random lottery. In the single-game combination lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “01H”, lottery value information corresponding to “1: failure → failure” is referred to, and the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “02H” When the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the lottery value information corresponding to “3: success” is referred to. The challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 to 3 are formally “challenge failure → last chance failure”, “challenge failure → last chance success”, and “challenge success”. 1-3 are abbreviated as “failure → failure”, “failure → success”, and “success”. Also in the table described below, the challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 to 3 may be abbreviated.

  According to such a single game combination lottery table, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, for example, the single game combination pattern No. 1 to 45 are determined by lottery. For example, the single game combination pattern No. If 43 (Aiko Count “100” → Serial “Let's settle!” → Small Button → Result Wins) is decided, it will be 100 consecutive draws at the 3R-6R in the jackpot game state. After the effect image is displayed, an effect image such as “I'll settle!” Is displayed along with the sound generated by the lines, and in the 8th to 9R eyes, an effect image showing a small effect button is displayed. After that, an effect image showing the winning as a result of Janken is displayed.

  The single-game combination lottery table is selected depending on whether or not the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game includes information indicating the winning of the big hit. You may prescribe | regulate so that the lottery rate of a game combination pattern may differ. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the big hit, and the information corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning can be performed is executed, a single game is won. If the lottery rate of the combination pattern No. 45 is defined to be relatively high and corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning is difficult is executed, the single-match game combination pattern No. 44 is You may prescribe | regulate so that it may become comparatively high. Moreover, you may prescribe | regulate so that the lottery rate of a single-game combination pattern may differ according to whether the information which shows winning of a big hit is contained in the hold information of a 2nd special symbol.

<Janken pattern lottery table>
19 and 20 are diagrams showing the Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2). The Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are one table, but for convenience, the Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are shown separately in two figures. The Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are tables that are referred to in the Janken pattern lottery process (S461 in FIG. 121) in the single-game effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are No. items to be decided. 1 to 10 Janken patterns and one-game combination pattern No. Reference items 1 to 45 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the Janken pattern by random lottery according to the reference items are defined. In the Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2), the single-game combination pattern No. The lottery value information corresponding to 1 to 45 is referred to.

  According to the Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2), the Janken pattern No. indicating the contents of the first to third Janken based on the single-game combination pattern. 1 to 10 are determined by lottery. For example, Janken Pattern No. If 10 (the first par, the second par, the third par) is decided, the first round of Janken will be par with the start of execution of the 3R in the big hit gaming state, the par at the second, the par at the third, and the draw An effect image is displayed.

  As for the Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2), whether or not the holding information stored in the work RAM 73 as the information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game includes information indicating the winning of the big hit. Depending on, the lottery rate of the Janken pattern may be specified to be different. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the big hit, and the information corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning can be performed is executed, the Janken pattern No. If the lottery rate of .10 is specified to be relatively high and corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning is difficult is executed, the Janken pattern No. 9 will be relatively high You may prescribe. Moreover, you may prescribe | regulate so that the lottery rate of a Janken pattern may differ according to whether the information which shows winning of a big hit is contained in the hold information of a 2nd special symbol.

<Table for 3rd challenge lottery>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a three-time challenge lottery table. The three-time challenge lottery table is a table referred to in the three-time challenge lottery process (S470 in FIG. 122) in the three-time challenge effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The table for the 3rd challenge lottery is a No. Displayed with reference items 1 to 29, 3 times challenge pattern, challenge success / failure pattern “1: Failure → Failure”, “2: Failure → Success”, and “3: Success”, and the effect contents of the 3 times challenge pattern The display mode of the effect button to be performed and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the challenge pattern by random lottery three times according to the reference item are defined. In the 3rd challenge lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “01H”, the lottery value information corresponding to “1: failure → failure” is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “02H”, The lottery value information corresponding to “2: failure → success” is referred to. When the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the lottery value information corresponding to “3: success” is referred to.

  According to such a three-time challenge lottery table, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, for example, with the battle content with a cow as a motif, the effect content corresponding to the 4R, 6R, and 8R in the big hit gaming state is basically 1 3rd challenge pattern No. indicating success or failure of the 3rd time. 1 to 29 are determined by lottery. For example, the 3rd challenge pattern No. When 29 (failure-failure-failure) is determined, the effect of urging the operation of a relatively large effect button together with the effect contents that fail (loss) in each of the 4R, 6R, and 8R of the big hit gaming state An image is displayed.

  In addition, as a table for the 3rd challenge lottery, after displaying success (win), displaying success or failure makes it possible to win big hits on the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game An effect pattern that suggests that information indicating a winning is included may be defined. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the big hit, and the information corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning is possible is executed, the success (winning) ) Is displayed, and if it corresponds to a big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning is difficult is executed, an effect image with the content of failure (losing) is displayed. Also good. Further, an effect image corresponding to either “success” or “failure” may be displayed depending on whether or not the information indicating the winning of the big hit is included in the hold information of the second special symbol.

<Success notification round lottery table>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a success notification round lottery table. The success notification round lottery table is a table that is referred to in the success notification round lottery process (S480 in FIG. 123) in the surprise effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The success notification round lottery table has a challenge success / failure pattern No. as a reference item. 1 to 3 (No. 1: failure → failure, No. 2: failure → success, and No. 3: success), and a round for notifying success as a decision item (hereinafter referred to as “success notification round”) ( “None”, “3R to 8R”) and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a success notification round by random lottery according to the reference item. In the success notification round lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “01H”, the lottery value information corresponding to “No. 1: failure → failure” is referred to, and the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “02H”. In this case, the lottery value information corresponding to “No. 2: Failure → Success” is referred to. When the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the lottery value information corresponding to “No. 3: Success” is referred to. . When the success notification round is determined to be any of 3R to 8R by the success notification round lottery table, success notification round flags “03H” to “08H” are set as the corresponding internal flags. However, when the success notification round is determined as “none”, the success notification round flag “02H” is set as the corresponding internal flag, and 3R to 8R become the non-success notification rounds. Each round from 3R to 8R up to the success notification round is also treated as a non-success notification round.

  According to such a success notification round lottery table, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, the “success” of the round execution that can be V-winned is impressed, and the round that notifies the fact is determined by lottery as the success notification round. . For example, when the challenge success / failure pattern is “No. 3: Success”, any one of rounds 3R to 8R in the jackpot gaming state is determined as the success notification round, and in the determined success notification round, V An effect image for notifying the execution of the winning round is displayed. However, if the challenge success / failure pattern is “No. 1: Failure → Failed” or “No. 2: Failure → Success”, the success notification round is uniformly “None” and the non-success notification round is determined. In such a case, the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won is not notified in any of the rounds 3R to 8R in the big hit gaming state. In addition, in the 3rd to 8Rth rounds, the rounds up to the success notification round are not notified of the execution of the round that can be awarded V as the non-success notification round.

  Note that the success notification round lottery table may be defined such that the success notification round can be determined as “none” even when the challenge success / failure pattern is “success”. Further, the lottery rate (lottery value information) when the challenge success / failure pattern is “success” is not limited to that shown in FIG. 22, and for example, the lottery rate corresponding to the first half of the 3R to 8R rounds is set high. Or you may prescribe | regulate so that the lottery rate of all the rounds of 3R-8R may become the same.

<Surprise pattern lottery table>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and a surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round). The surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) are tables that are referred to in a surprise pattern lottery process (S483 in FIG. 123) in a surprise effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. is there. The surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) is referred to, for example, in order to determine a surprise pattern in advance for each of the 3R to 8R non-success notification rounds. The surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) is referred to in advance to determine a surprise pattern corresponding to the success notification round. The surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) has a surprise pattern No. as a decision item. 1 to 15, unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) serving as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a surprise pattern by random lottery according to the reference items. . The surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) has a surprise pattern No. as a decision item. 1-15, success notification rounds (3R to 8R) serving as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a surprise pattern by random lottery according to the reference items. In the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round), corresponding lottery value information is referenced according to 3R to 8R of the non-success notification round and the success notification round.

  According to the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round), the corresponding surprise pattern No. 1 to 6 are determined by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern corresponding to the 3rd round of the unsuccessful notification round is No. In the case of 2, the effect image that prompts the operation of the relatively small effect button in the 3R eye of the big hit gaming state and impresses the “failure” of the round execution that can be V-winned is displayed as the operation result. On the other hand, according to the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round), the Surprise Pattern No. 7 to 15 are determined by lottery. For example, the success notification round is 3R and the surprise pattern is No. In the case of 12, the effect image that urges the operation of the relatively small effect button in the 3R game of the big hit gaming state, and impresses the “success” of the round execution that can be V-winned as the operation result is displayed. For example, when the success notification round is the seventh round, the surprise pattern corresponding to the third to sixth Rs of the non-success notification round is determined, and the surprise pattern corresponding to the seventh R of the success notification round is determined. The corresponding surprise pattern is not determined for the 8Rth round that follows the success notification round.

  As a surprise pattern lottery table, a special symbol game start-up memory is displayed by displaying an effect image that impresses “success” or “failure” after displaying an effect image that impresses “success”. Content that suggests that the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the information includes information indicating that the jackpot is won. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating the winning of the big hit, and the information corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning can be won is executed, “success” An effect image that gives an impression of “failure” may be displayed when the effect image is displayed corresponding to a big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning is difficult is executed. . In addition, depending on whether or not the information indicating the winning of the big hit is included in the hold information of the second special symbol, after displaying an effect image that impresses “success”, “success” or “failure” is displayed. An effect image that gives an impression may be displayed.

<Icon pattern lottery table>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R). The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) are tables that are referred to in the icon pattern lottery process (S491 in FIG. 124) in the icon determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) are referred to in order to determine the final display color of the corresponding icon for each round of 4R to 8R. Here, the “final display color” means a display color that an icon indicating each round of 4R to 8R exhibits when the round is executed, and the display color after the round is changed or without change. Appears when the display color is maintained. The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) have icon pattern Nos. To be determined. 1 to 4 (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) and a surprise pattern No. as a reference item. 1 to 15 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an icon pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) corresponding to each round of 4R to 8R are prepared. In the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R), lottery value information corresponding to the surprise pattern is referred to for each round of 4R to 8R.

  According to the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R), the surprise pattern No. 1 to 15, an icon pattern No. indicating the final display color of the icon displayed corresponding to each round of 4R to 8R. 1-4 are determined by lottery. For example, the icon pattern lottery table (8R) is referred to in order to determine in advance the final display color at the time of execution of the 8R round for the icon corresponding to the 8R. In this icon pattern lottery table (8R), the surprise pattern is No. 15 is the icon pattern No. with the probability that the lottery rate is 1600/32768. 4 is determined. Thereby, when the 8R round is executed, the display color of the icon indicating the 8R is red. Similarly, for the 4th to 7R rounds, the 4R to 7R rounds displayed when the 4th to 7R rounds are executed by referring to the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R). The display color of the corresponding icon is determined.

  In the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) of the present embodiment, the same lottery rate is used in all tables corresponding to 4R to 8R. You may make it do. In this embodiment, the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to 3R is not provided. However, by providing the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to 3R, the display color of the icon corresponding to the 3R eye is changed. May be. Further, as the icon display color, a special color other than the color described above, for example, gold can be displayed, and a round in which such a special gold icon is displayed must be a success notification round. Also good.

<Icon change lottery table>
25 to 29 are diagrams showing icon change lottery tables. The icon change lottery table is a table that is referred to in the icon change lottery process (S494 in FIG. 124) in the icon determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The icon change lottery table (4R white icon) in FIG. 25 is displayed for each 4R-8R icon whose final display color is determined using the icon pattern lottery table (4R-8R) described above. Referenced to determine how many colors to change from white at the time of round execution. Similarly, the icon change lottery table (5R white icon, 5R blue icon, 5R green icon, 5R red icon) in FIG. 26, and the icon change lottery table (6R white icon, 6R blue icon, 6R green icon) in FIG. 28 icon change lottery table (7R white icon, 7R blue icon, 7R green icon, 7R red icon), FIG. 29 icon change lottery table (8R white icon, 8R blue icon, 8R green) Icon, 8R red icon) is referred to determine the color to be changed at the time of execution of each round of 5R to 8R for each icon of 4R to 8R for which the final display color is determined. . These icon change lottery tables have changed icon pattern Nos. To be determined. 1 to 4 (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon), the final display color of the icons corresponding to each round of 4R to 8R serving as reference items, and the change after changing according to the reference items It defines lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an icon pattern by random lottery. In the icon change lottery table, the lottery value information corresponding to the display color at the time of execution of each round of 4R to 8R is referred to for the icon for which the final display color is determined.

  For example, a case where the display color of the icon indicating the 8R eye is finally determined to be red when the 8R round is executed will be described as an example. In this case, the icon indicating the 8R eye is as follows. The 4R to 8R change modes are determined for the display colors. In this case, in the icon change lottery table (4R white icon) in FIG. 25, the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate is 8192/32768, respectively. 1-4 are determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R icon that finally becomes red can be changed to white, blue, green, or red with a probability of 1/4 when the 4R round is executed. . At this time, as an example, the icon pattern No. Assume that 1 is determined, and it is determined that the display color does not change when the 4R round is executed, and becomes white.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of round execution of the 5R after the 4R is white, the icon change lottery table (5R white icon) in FIG. 26 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (5R white icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is determined with the probability that the lottery rate is 8192/32768, respectively. 1-4 are determined. As a result, for the 8R icon that will eventually become red, it is determined that the display color can be changed from white to white, blue, green, or red with a probability of 1/4 when the 5R round is executed. Is done. At this time, as an example, the icon pattern No. 2 is determined, and it is determined that the display color changes from white to blue when the 5R round is executed.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the 6R round execution is blue, the icon change lottery table (6R blue icon) in FIG. 27 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (6R blue icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. 1 and the probability that the lottery rate is 0, the icon pattern No. 2, the probability of the lottery rate 10922/32768 is the icon pattern No. 3 with the probability that the lottery rate is 10924/32768. 4 is determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R-th icon that finally becomes red can be changed from blue to white, green, or red with a predetermined probability when the 6R-th round is executed. At this time, as an example, for example, the icon pattern No. 3 is determined, and it is determined that the display color changes from blue to green when the sixth round is executed.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of execution of the seventh round is green, the icon change lottery table (7R green icon) in FIG. 28 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (7R green icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with a probability that the lottery rate is 16384/32768 respectively. 1 or No. 4 is determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R icon that is finally red is changed from green to white or red with a predetermined probability when the 7R round is executed. At this time, as an example, for example, the icon pattern No. 4 is determined, and it is determined that the display color changes from green to red when the seventh round is executed.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of execution of the 8th round is red, the icon change lottery table (8R red icon) in FIG. 28 is referred to. In the icon change lottery table (8R red icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is determined with the probability that the lottery rate is 32768/32768. 1 is determined. Accordingly, it is determined that the display color of the 8R icon that finally becomes red is maintained red without changing the display color when the 8R round is executed.

<Surprising success letter belt lottery table>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a surprise success character band lottery table. The surprise success character band lottery table is a table that is referred to in the surprise successful character band lottery process (S502 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The surprise success character band lottery table has a character band pattern No. as a decision item. 1 to 31 and a surprise pattern No. as a reference item. 7 to 15 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the surprise success character band lottery table, lottery value information corresponding to the surprise pattern is referred to in order to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the success notification round.

  According to the surprise success character band lottery table, the surprise pattern no. 7 to 15, a character band pattern No. indicating a character message displayed in the success notification round. 1-31 are determined by lottery. For example, if the surprise pattern is No. 15 is a character band pattern No. with a predetermined lottery rate. Any one of 12, 13, 16 to 21, 23 to 28 is determined. As a result, in the success notification round, a character message that is a sign of a round in which a V prize can be won is displayed.

  In the surprise success character band lottery table of the present embodiment, the character band pattern No. 1 to 10 are not determined, but these character band pattern Nos. 1 to 10 may be determined.

<Surprise failure character belt lottery table>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2) and (surprise pattern No. 3). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 4) and (surprise pattern No. 5). FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 6). These surprise failure character band lottery tables are tables that are referred to in the surprise failure character band lottery process (S504 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The surprise failure character band lottery table has a character band pattern No. 1 to 31, a non-success notification round (3R to 8R) serving as a reference item, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random lottery according to the reference item Yes. In the surprise failure character band lottery table, in order to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the unsuccessful notification round (3R to 8R), lottery value information corresponding to 3R to 8R is provided for each of the surprise patterns No. 1 to 6. Referenced.

  According to the surprise failure character band lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2), the surprise pattern is No. 2, based on 3R to 8R of the unsuccessful notification round, a character band pattern No. indicating a character message displayed in the unsuccessful notification round. 12 to 21 are determined by lottery. For example, if the surprise pattern is No. For the 3R unsuccessful notification round of No. 2, the character band pattern No. 1 has a probability of a lottery rate of 10,000 / 32768. Twelve “??” are determined. Similarly, the surprise pattern No. Also in the case of 3 to 6, the character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in 3R to 8R which is the unsuccessful notification round. 12 to 21 are determined by lottery. As a result, in the unsuccessful notification round, a text message is displayed so as to expect execution of a round in which V winning can be achieved.

  In the surprise failure character band lottery table of this embodiment, the surprise pattern No. The table is divided into 2 to 6, and the character band pattern No. corresponding to the unsuccessful notification round for displaying the character message for each table (surprise pattern). 12 to 21 can be determined, but the surprise failure character band lottery table is used as one table, and the character band pattern can be determined based on the surprise pattern and the unsuccessful notification round from this one table. You may do it.

<Surprise Gase character band lottery table>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a surprise gaze character band lottery table (white icon) and (blue icon). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a surprise gasset character band lottery table (green icon) and (red icon). These surprise gase character band lottery tables are tables that are referred to in the surprise gase character band lottery process (S505 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The Surprise Gase character band lottery table has a character band pattern No. 1 to 31, a non-success notification round (3R to 8R) serving as a reference item, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random lottery according to the reference item Yes. In the Surprise Gase character band lottery table, the Surprise Pattern No. 3R for each icon display color (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the unsuccessful notification round (3R to 8R) determined as “none” of 1 The lottery value information corresponding to ˜8R is referred to.

  According to the surprise gaze character band lottery table (white icon), the surprise pattern No. When the display color after the change of the icon displayed in one unsuccessful notification round (the display color that is maintained when there is no change) is white, the unsuccessful notification round is based on 3R to 8R of the unsuccessful notification round. Character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in the notification round. 1 to 14 are determined by lottery. For example, for the 3R unsuccessful notification round in which the corresponding icon is a white icon, the character band pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate is 1200/32768. Twelve “??” are determined. Similarly, for the unsuccessful notification rounds (3R to 8R) in which the corresponding icons are a blue icon, a green icon, and a red icon, the character band pattern No. 1 to 14 are determined by lottery. As a result, in the unsuccessful notification round in which the execution of the round in which the V prize can be won is not notified, a character message that may be a gusset may be displayed.

  In the surprise gasset character band lottery table of the present embodiment, the table is divided for each icon color after change, and the character band pattern of the character message that becomes the gasset can be determined for each table (icon color after change). However, it is possible to determine the character band pattern based on the icon color after the change corresponding to the unsuccessful notification round from this one table as one table for the surprise gasset character band lottery table. Also good. Further, the character band pattern may be determined based on the icon color before the change.

<Surprising Gase Subsequent Character Band Lottery Table>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a surprise gasset subsequent character band lottery table. This surprise gasset subsequent character band lottery table is a table that is referred to in the subsequent character band lottery process (S508 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The Surprise Gase Subsequent Character Band Lottery Processing Table has a character band pattern No. 1 to 31, a non-success notification round (3R to 8R) serving as a reference item, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a character band pattern by random lottery according to the reference item Yes. In the Surprise Gase Subsequent Character Band Lottery Table, when a predetermined character band pattern (No. 1 to 10) to be displayed in the unsuccessful notification round is determined, subsequent characters to be displayed subsequently In order to determine a predetermined number of band patterns, corresponding lottery value information is referred to every 3R to 8R.

  According to the surprise gasset succeeding character band lottery table, based on 3R to 8R of the unsuccessful notification rounds in which the predetermined character band pattern (No. 1 to 10) to be the gusset is determined, Character band pattern No. indicating a subsequent character message to be displayed. 1 to 10 are determined by lottery. For example, for the 3R unsuccessful notification round, the character band pattern No. 1 is “Don't miss a surprise chance!” As a result, in a non-success notification round in which the execution of a round in which V winning can be won is not announced, a subsequent character message may be displayed following a character message that causes a frustration.

  The surprise gasset subsequent character band lottery table of this embodiment includes, for example, up to six character band pattern numbers indicating subsequent character messages. 1 to 10 can be repeatedly referred to, but it can be used in the same manner when determining five or less or seven or more subsequent character band patterns.

<Additional bonus hold lottery table>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an extra bonus reservation lottery table. This extra bonus reservation consecutive lottery table is a table that is referred to in the extra bonus reservation consecutive lottery process (S533 of FIG. 127) in the additional bonus reservation consecutive determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the bonus bonus consecutive lottery table, a BGM different from normal is played during the big hit gaming state when the holding information related to the second special symbol includes a winning feature for a predetermined big hit symbol or a small bonus symbol. This table is used to determine whether or not to execute a special effect such as. The bonus bonus consecutive lottery table is a winning item related to the second special symbol as a reference item ("probable variation 1" to "probable variation 10" of the big winning symbol, "small bonus" of the small winning symbol), and is determined. Winning / non-winning information (No. 1: non-winning, No. 2: winning) and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining winning / non-winning by random lottery according to the reference item It prescribes. In the additional bonus reservation lottery table, the information indicating the winning of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is included in the hold information related to the second special symbol stored in the work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game. The lottery value information is referred to according to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol.

  According to the extra bonus holding lottery table, the bonus bonus holding run is based on “probable variation 1” to “probable variation 10” of the big hit symbol or “small hit” of the small hit symbol included in the holding information together with information indicating the winning. As a result of the lottery process, non-winning (No. 1) or winning (No. 2) is determined by lottery. For example, when the jackpot symbol of “probability change 1” is included in the holding information related to the second special symbol, in the bonus bonus consecutive lottery process, the winning (No. 1) is determined with the probability that the lottery rate is 6554/32768. The winning (No. 2) is determined with the probability that the lottery rate is 26214/32768. As a result, when winning (No. 2) is determined, a special effect different from the effect related to the normal extra bonus in the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol “probability change 1” of the second special symbol. Is executed.

  In addition, in the bonus bonus consecutive lottery table of the present embodiment, the winning (No. 2) becomes easier to be determined as the jackpot gaming state related to the second special symbol advantageous to the player is reached. You may make it win even in a hit game state. If there is no holding information related to the second special symbol, a lottery may be performed based on the holding information related to the first special symbol. Moreover, you may make it perform lottery based on all the hold information, without distinguishing the hold information of a 2nd special symbol and a 1st special symbol. Also, the BGM may be different depending on the type of winning symbol, and when a plurality of winning symbols are included in the hold information, a BGM different from other BGMs may flow. Further, the special effects are not limited to BGM, and the image display mode and the light emission mode of a light emitting member such as a decorative lamp may be varied.

<Scenario group lottery table>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a scenario group lottery table. This scenario group lottery table is a table that is referred to in the scenario group lottery process (S540 in FIG. 128) in the bonus scenario type determination process for the sub CPU 71 described later. The scenario group lottery table is a table used to determine scenario groups A to D in which presentation scenarios in the extra bonus presentation mode are roughly classified. The scenario group lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 serving as reference items, scenario groups A to D serving as determination items, and lottery value information for determining a scenario group by random lottery according to the reference items (random number range). : 32768). In the scenario group lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the hit patterns 4 to 11 corresponding to the extra bonus.

  In the scenario group lottery table, scenario groups A to D are determined by lottery based on the winning patterns 4 to 11. According to this scenario group lottery table, for example, in the case of winning pattern 4, scenario group A (no combo) is determined with the probability that the lottery rate will be 7816/32768, and the scenario with the probability that the lottery rate will be 18400/32768. Scenario B (with a combo) is determined, scenario group C ([A] -based SP character) is determined with a probability that the lottery rate is 1952/32768, and scenario group D (with a probability that the lottery rate is 4600/32768) [B] base SP character) is determined. As a result, in the extra bonus, the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the determined major classification scenario groups A to D.

  In the scenario group lottery table of this embodiment, all of the scenario groups A to D can be determined only for the hit pattern 4, but all of the scenario groups A to D are also possible for the hit patterns 5 to 11. Alternatively, a part may be determined.

<Scenario type lottery table>
39 and 40 are diagrams showing scenario type lottery tables (hit patterns 4 to 11). These scenario type lottery tables are tables that are referred to in the scenario type lottery process (S541 in FIG. 128) in the bonus scenario type determination process for the sub CPU 71 described later. The scenario type lottery table includes scenario types No. 1 in which the production scenarios in the bonus bonus production mode are divided into medium categories. It is a table used in order to determine 1-9. The scenario type lottery table is prepared for each of the winning patterns 4 to 11, and the scenario groups A to D as reference items and the scenario type No. as a decision item. 1 to 9 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the scenario type by random lottery according to the reference item. In the scenario type lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the scenario groups A to D for each of the winning patterns 4 to 11.

  In the scenario type lottery table (hit patterns 4 to 11), the scenario type No. is assigned to each of the hit patterns 4 to 11 based on the scenario groups A to D. 1 to 9 are determined by lottery. For example, when the winning pattern is 4, the scenario type lottery table (winning pattern 4) is referred to. According to the scenario type lottery table (success pattern 4), in the case of scenario group A (no combo), the scenario type No. 2 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768. 1 (Aa: no combo / no resurrection) is determined, and the scenario type No. is determined with a probability that the lottery rate is 9830/32768. 2 (Ab: no combo / failure ⇒ resurrection) is determined. In the case of scenario group B (with combo), the scenario type No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate is 22938/32768. 4 (Ba: with combo / without resurrection) is determined, and the scenario type No. is determined with the probability that the lottery rate is 9830/32768. 5 (Bb: combo / failure ⇒ resurrection) is determined. In the case of scenario group C ([A] -based SP character), the scenario type No. is selected with a probability that the lottery rate is 22938/32768. 7 (Ca: [Aa] -based SP character) is determined, and the scenario type No. 7 is determined with a probability that the lottery rate is 9830/32768. 8 (Cb: [Ab] base SP character) is determined. In the case of scenario group D ([B] -based SP character), the scenario type No. is selected with the probability that the draw rate will be 32768/32768. 9 (Da: [Ba] -based SP character) is determined. For the other winning patterns 5 to 11, the corresponding scenario type lottery table is selected in the same manner, and the scenario type No. Any one of 1 to 9 is determined. As a result, in the extra bonus, the scenario type No. The effect is executed in a manner corresponding to any one of 1 to 9.

  In the scenario type lottery table of the present embodiment, in the case of the hit pattern 4, the scenario type No. 3 (Ac: no combo / finish ⇒ resurrection) and No. 3 6 (Bc: Combo present / end → recovery) is not determined. All or part of 1 to 9 may be determined.

<Scenario number lottery table>
41 to 49 are diagrams showing scenario number lottery tables (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The scenario number lottery table is a table referred to in the scenario number lottery process (S542 in FIG. 128) in the bonus scenario type determination process for the sub CPU 71 described later. The scenario number lottery table shows the scenario of the production in the bonus bonus production mode with the scenario type No. It is a table used in order to determine the scenario number subdivided for every 1-9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The scenario number lottery table shows the scenario type no. 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da) are prepared for each of reference patterns 4 to 11 as a reference item and determination items determined for each scenario type Scenario number and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the scenario number by random lottery according to the reference item. In the scenario number lottery table, the scenario type No. The lottery value information is referenced according to the hit patterns 4 to 11 for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da).

  In the scenario number lottery table (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), the scenario type No. A scenario number is determined by lottery based on hit patterns 4 to 11 for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). For example, scenario type No. In the case of 1 (Aa), the scenario number lottery table (Aa) is referred to. According to the scenario number lottery table (Aa), in the case of the winning pattern 4, the scenario number No. is determined with a probability that the lottery rate is 32768/32768. 65 is determined. In the case of hit patterns 5 and 6, the scenario type No. Since 1 (Aa) cannot be determined, the scenario number cannot also be determined. In the case of the winning pattern 4, the scenario number No. is selected with a probability that the lottery rate is 32768/32768. 65 is determined. In the case of the winning pattern 7, the scenario number No. is selected with a probability that the lottery rate is 32768/32768. 64 is determined. In the case of the hit pattern 8, the scenario number No. If any one of 51 to 63 is determined and the hit pattern is 9, the scenario number No. If any one of 24 to 50 is determined and the hit pattern is 10, the scenario number No. 6 to 23 is determined, and in the case of the hit pattern 11, the scenario number No. Any one of 1 to 5 is determined. Other scenario type No. Similarly, for 2 to 9 (Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), the corresponding scenario number lottery table is selected, and the scenario number corresponding to the scenario type is determined. Thereby, in the extra bonus, the effect is executed based on the scenario number corresponding to the scenario type for each winning pattern.

<Additional bonus scenario table>
50 to 76 are diagrams showing additional bonus scenario tables (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The additional bonus scenario table includes a press operation button operation determination process (FIG. 113) of the sub CPU 71 described later, a combo RUSH lottery process (S544 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process, and an additional bonus roulette lottery process in the initial bonus initial process. (S550 in FIG. 129), an effect lottery determination process (FIG. 131), and a bonus bonus round effect process (FIG. 142). The extra bonus scenario table is a table used for determining specific contents of the extra bonus. An additional bonus scenario table is prepared for each scenario type (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), and a scenario number and a real round are executed according to the scenario type as a reference item. The number of rounds to be played, the production types A to N indicating the content of the production to be determined, the number of additions such as “character”, “combo”, “RUSH”, the number of remaining winning balls (the number of remaining winning balls), the total winning balls (Total number of winning balls) and total number (total number). In the additional bonus scenario table, for each scenario type (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), based on the scenario number and the number of real rounds, the production types A to N, the number of additions, The number of remaining winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the total number are determined.

  The production types A to N classify production contents such as production images. In this embodiment, the production type A corresponds to the production content “Waiting for character revival”, the production type B corresponds to the production content “determine initial value”, and the production type C is “character appearance failure”. The production type D corresponds to the production content of “character appearance success-no combo”, the production type E corresponds to the production content of “character appearance success-with combo”, and the production type F is , “Character Appearance Success-Combo Existence-RUSH rush”, the production type G corresponds to the production content “Combo RUSH”, and the production type H corresponds to the production content “SP Character Appearance”. The production type I corresponds to the production content of “character revival”, the production type J corresponds to the production content of “blossom revival-no combo”, and the production type K is “凛凛”. The production type “L” corresponds to the production content “Reviving-with combo”, the production type “L” corresponds to the production content “Rebirth of combo-with combo-RUSH rush”, and the production type “M” is the production content “End screen-reverse”. Applicable, the effect type N corresponds to the effect content “no effect” (see FIG. 181).

  In addition, the additional number of “character” is the number for effect display added when the main character appears, and the additional number of “combo” is the effect added when the character appears continuously for two or more rounds. This is the number for display, and the additional number “RUSH” is the number for effect display that is added when a predetermined button operation is performed when the effect button is displayed. The total number is a number for calculation reference that is calculated by accumulating the maximum number of winning balls per round (100 in this embodiment) for all the actual rounds. The upper limit number of winning balls corresponds to the number of effect displays added and displayed as the upper limit per round on the display screen, and the number of winning balls according to the actual upper limit winning number per round is It doesn't mean. However, as numerical values, the number of winning balls and the upper limit winning ball number corresponding to the actual upper limit winning number per round (10 in the present embodiment) are the same value. The total number of winning balls is an effect display number calculated by accumulating the number of extra balls for each real round. The remaining number of winning balls is the upper limit payout ball number obtained by accumulating the upper limit number of winning balls per round for each real round until the actual round starts. This corresponds to the number for calculation reference calculated by subtracting the number of payout prize balls from the total number of prize balls. The number of remaining prize balls is counted by a remaining prize ball counter described later.

  By referring to such an extra bonus scenario table, in the extra bonus, the effect images corresponding to the effect types A to N are displayed for each substantial round based on the scenario number corresponding to the scenario type, and further, the schedule Until the total number (scheduled grant quantity) is reached, the total number of winning balls for effect display and the total number of payouts (number of payout balls) are displayed. In the present embodiment, even if the actual total number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payout balls or the actual number of wins exceeds the maximum number of winning balls (the actual number of winning balls is the maximum number of winning balls) Even when the number exceeds the number), the number of payout winning balls corresponding to the upper limit payout winning ball number is displayed as the total payout number for effect display. The difference between the total number of prize balls for effect display and the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) corresponds to the number of remaining prize balls.

<Combo RUSH lottery table>
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a combo RUSH lottery table. The combo RUSH lottery table is a table that is referred to in the combo RUSH lottery process (S544 in FIG. 128) in the bonus scenario type determination process for the sub CPU 71 described later. The combo RUSH lottery table is an operation that prescribes the timing at which a part addition display or a part addition display is performed according to the button operation when the number of additions corresponding to the “combo RUSH” of the production type G is determined. Number pattern No. It is a table used in order to determine 1-44. The combo RUSH lottery table includes an additional number corresponding to “combo RUSH” as a reference item and an operation frequency pattern No. as a decision item. 1 to 44 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the operation frequency pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the combo RUSH lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the number of additions corresponding to “combo RUSH”.

  In the combo RUSH lottery table, the operation number pattern No. is based on the number of extras corresponding to “combo RUSH” determined using the extra bonus scenario table. 1 to 44 are determined by lottery. For example, when the number of additions corresponding to “Combo RUSH” is “+200”, the lottery rate is the operation frequency pattern No. Any one of 10 to 14 is determined. Operation frequency pattern No. 10 to 14 is that the number of additions to be finally added and displayed is “+200”, and the number of additions is set to four, and each time “+50” is reached when the predetermined number of operations is reached. It is specified. More specifically, for example, the operation frequency pattern No. 14 (5 → 3 → 5 → 5), when the number of operation of the button operation (pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A) first reaches five times, the additional number is displayed as “+50”, and then the button operation is performed. When the number of operations reaches 3, the additional number is displayed as “+100”. When the number of button operations reaches 5, the additional number is displayed as “+150”. When the number of operations reaches 5, the final number is added and displayed as “+200”.

  In this embodiment, the number of additions is increased by “+50”. For example, if the number of additions to be finally displayed is “+400”, the number of additions is 8, and “+300”. If so, the number of additions is uniquely determined according to the number of additions so that the number of additions is 6. However, the number of additions and the number to be added can be determined in a multi-dimensional manner according to the number of additions. Good. For example, when the number of additions is “+400”, the number of additions is 4 times, and “+100” is added and displayed. When the number of additions is “+300”, the number of additions is 30 times and “+10” is added and displayed. May be. Further, the number to be added may be changed for each addition display. For example, when the additional number is “+400”, “+100”, “+50”, and “+250” may be sequentially added.

<Roulette lottery table>
FIG. 78 shows a roulette lottery table. The roulette lottery table is a table that is referred to in the bonus bonus roulette lottery process (S550 in FIG. 129) in the bonus bonus initial process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the roulette lottery table, when an additional number corresponding to “initial value determination” of the effect type B is determined, an initial value pattern No. indicating the additional number as an initial value together with a display image simulating roulette. It is a table used in order to determine 1-6. In the roulette lottery table, the initial value of the additional number as a reference item and the initial value pattern No. as a decision item are displayed. 1 to 6 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an initial value pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the roulette lottery table, lottery value information is referred to in accordance with the initial value of the additional number.

  In the roulette lottery table, the initial value pattern No. is determined based on the number of additions (initial value) corresponding to the “initial value determination” of the effect type B determined using the additional bonus scenario table. 1 to 6 (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) are determined by lottery. The initial value (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) corresponds to an additional number that is added and displayed in the first round of the first round. In the roulette lottery table of the present embodiment, lottery value information is defined so that one initial value pattern that uniquely corresponds to the initial value of the number of additions is determined.

<Roulette pattern lottery table>
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a roulette pattern lottery table. The roulette pattern lottery table is a table that is referred to in the bonus bonus roulette pattern lottery process (S551 in FIG. 129) in the bonus bonus initial process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the roulette pattern lottery table, when the initial value pattern is determined using the roulette lottery table, the roulette pattern No. indicating the mode of the roulette and stop button to be displayed according to the initial value pattern. It is a table used in order to determine 1-5. The roulette pattern lottery table includes an initial value pattern (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) serving as a reference item and a roulette pattern No. serving as a decision item. 1 to 5 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the roulette pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the roulette pattern lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the initial value pattern.

  In the roulette pattern lottery table, the roulette pattern No. is determined based on the initial value pattern (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) determined using the roulette lottery table. One of 1 to 5 is determined by lottery. In the roulette pattern lottery table, for example, when the initial value pattern is 200, the roulette pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate is 27768/32768. 1 is determined, and the roulette pattern No. 1 is determined with a probability that the lottery rate is 5000/32768. 2 is determined. Roulette pattern No. 2, a roulette with 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, and 1500 is displayed as an outcome, and an effect button is displayed with the display size as a middle button. For example, when the initial value pattern is 1500, a roulette with 700 to 1400 points that cannot be determined as the initial value may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to notify the player that the initial value is determined as 1500 from a roulette display mode different from the normal one.

<Title determination lottery table>
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a title determination lottery table. The title determination lottery table is a table referred to in an additional bonus title determination process (S552 in FIG. 129) in an additional bonus initial process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The title determination lottery table includes a title pattern No. indicating a change in the display color of the title displayed for the extra bonus. 1 is a table used for determining 1 to 14 based on hit patterns 4 to 11. The title determination lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 serving as reference items and title pattern Nos. Serving as determination items. 1 to 14 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the title pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the title determination lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the winning patterns 4 to 11.

  In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is based on the winning patterns 4-11. Any one of 1 to 14 is determined by lottery. When the roulette display image is displayed, the pressing button 9A is operated to stop the fluctuation display of the roulette. In the title determination lottery table, in order to change the display color of the title before and after the operation of the push button 9A for stopping the fluctuation display of the roulette, the title pattern No. 1 to 14 are determined. For example, the title pattern No. 2 (blue → yellow), the title display color is blue before the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, and the title display color is yellow after the operation of the pressing operation button 9A. Note that the title display color may not change at all before and after the button operation, or the title display color may be changed twice or more, and each time the button operation is performed, the color is sequentially changed to the set color. May be.

<Chance up lottery table>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a chance-up lottery table. The chance-up lottery table is a table that is referred to in the chance-up lottery process (S562 in FIG. 130) in the additional bonus effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The chance-up lottery table includes a chance-up pattern No. indicating the display size of the aura color arranged in the background of the character and the effect button displayed before the additional number is displayed as the effect of the extra bonus. 1 to 6 are character effect pattern Nos. In a character type lottery table to be described later. It is a table used in order to determine based on 1-30. The chance up lottery table has a character effect pattern No. as a reference item. 1 to 30 and a chance up pattern No. 1 to 6 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a chance-up pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the chance-up lottery table, the character effect pattern No. The lottery value information is referred to according to 1-30.

  In the chance-up lottery table, the character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 based on chance up pattern No. One of 1 to 6 is determined by lottery. For example, the chance up pattern No. 2 (blue effect large button) displays a character with blue as an aura color, and displays an effect button with a large display size before displaying the additional number. In the present embodiment, the chance up pattern No. The additional number is different according to 1-6. Further, as the number of additions increases relatively, the probability that the aura color is determined in the order of blue <green <red is increased. When the large button is determined, the additional number is always added.

<Character type lottery table>
82 to 86 are diagrams showing character type lottery tables. The character type lottery table is a table that is referred to in the effect lottery determination process (FIG. 131) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The character type lottery table includes a character effect pattern No. indicating the appearance mode of characters and objects and the number of additions accompanying the appearance (hereinafter referred to as “added value”). It is a table used in order to determine 1-30 based on production types and added values. In particular, FIG. 82 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the production type C or H. FIG. 83 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the effect type D or J when the total number of winning balls reaches the upper limit (total number 1500). FIG. 84 shows the character type lottery table corresponding to the production type D or J and the production type F determined in the next round, and the production type D or J in the next round. A character type lottery table corresponding to a case other than type F is determined is shown. FIG. 85 shows the character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the effect type is E, F, K, or L and the added value due to the appearance of the character is “+50”, and the effect types E, F, K, Or, the character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the added value due to the appearance of the character is “+100” is shown. FIG. 86 shows the character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the effect type is E, F, K, or L and the addition value due to the appearance of the character is “+150”, and the effect types E, F, K, Or, the character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the added value due to the appearance of the character is “+200” is shown.

  The character type lottery table (effect type C or H) shown in FIG. 82 includes the effect types C and H as reference items and the character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), lottery value information is referred to according to the effect types C and H. In the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), the character effect pattern No. 1 (character appearance failure) is determined and the character effect pattern No. 2 (SP character appearance addition value “MAX”) is determined. The added value “MAX” is, for example, an effect of performing addition display so that the total number of winning balls is “1500” by the appearance of the SP character, as shown in the 5th R in the added bonus scenario table (Ca) of FIG. It corresponds to. In the present embodiment, the character effect pattern No. is referred to with reference to the character type lottery table (effect type C or H). 1 and 2 are determined. Since the character effect patterns are uniquely determined for the effect types C and H, the character effect pattern is determined without using a table or a random lottery process. May be.

  83. The character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached) shown in FIG. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. The character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached) is, for example, the scenario number No. in the added bonus scenario table (Bb) of FIG. As indicated by No. 13R, the table is referred to when the total number of winning balls reaches “1500” by the added value “150” by “Character”. In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached), lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character. In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached), when the added value is “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 11 (below bull character x 2 appearance addition value +50 (1500 reached)) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, the character effect pattern No. 12 (below bull character x 2 appearance addition value +100 (1500 reached)) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 13 (behind cow character x 2 appearance addition value +150 (1500 reached)) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, the character effect pattern No. 14 (below cow character x 2 appearance addition value +200 (1500 reached)) is determined. In the present embodiment, the character effect pattern No. is referred to by referring to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached). 11 to 14 are determined, but since the determination item (character effect pattern) is uniquely determined for the reference item, the character effect pattern is determined without using a table or random number lottery processing. You may do it. Also, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

  84. The character type lottery table (effect type D or J + next round effect type F) and the character type lottery table (other than effect type D or J + next round effect type F) shown in FIG. 84 appear as reference items. (+50, +100, +150, +200) and the character effect pattern No. that is a decision item. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In these character type lottery tables (effect type D or J + next round effect type F) and character type lottery tables (other than effect type D or J + next round effect type F), an added value (+50) due to the appearance of the character. , +100, +150, +200), the lottery value information is referred to. In the character type lottery table (the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round) on the upper side of FIG. 84, when the added value is “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 3 (appearance added value on cow character +50) or No. 7 (cow character top x 2 appearance addition value +50) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, the character effect pattern No. 4 (Appearance value under cow character +100) or No. 8 (cow character top x 2 appearance addition value +100) is determined. When the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 5 (cattle character right appearance addition value +150) or No. 9 (cow character x 2 appearance addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, the character effect pattern No. 6 (cattle character left appearance addition value +200) or No. 10 (on the cow character × 2 appearance addition value + 200) is determined. In the character type lottery table at the bottom of FIG. 84 (except for the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round), when the added value is “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 3 (appearance addition value +50 on the cow character) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, the character effect pattern No. 4 (cattle character appearance addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 5 (cow character right appearance addition value +150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, the character effect pattern No. 6 (cow character left appearance addition value +200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table at the bottom of FIG. 84 (except for the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round), the character effect pattern No. Although 3 to 6 are uniquely determined, the character effect pattern may be determined without using a table or random number lottery processing. Also, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

  The character type lottery table (effect type E, F, K, or L + addition value by character appearance + 50) and character type lottery table (effect type E, F, K, or L + addition value by character appearance) shown in FIG. , The added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item, and the character effect pattern No. as the decision item. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In these character type lottery tables (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance + 50) and character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance + 100) The lottery value information is referred to according to the addition value (+50, +100, +150, +200) by the combo. In the character type lottery table on the upper side of FIG. 85 (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value by appearance of character + 50), when the added value is “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 15 (on cow character + sun appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, character effect pattern No. 16 (on the bull character + sun appearance addition value +50 combo addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 17 (on cow character + sun × 2 appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, character effect pattern No. 18 (on the cow character + sun × 2 appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table on the lower side of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to appearance of character + 100), the character effect pattern No. 19 (on the cow character + month appearance addition value + 100 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, the character effect pattern No. 20 (on the cow character + month appearance addition value +100 combo addition value +100) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 21 (on cow character + month × 2 appearance addition value + 100 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, character effect pattern No. 22 (on the cow character + month × 2 appearance addition value + 100 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In these character type lottery tables, the character effect pattern is uniquely determined, but the character effect pattern may be determined without using a table or random number lottery processing. Also, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

  The character type lottery table shown in FIG. 86 (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value by appearance of character + 150) and character type lottery table (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value by appearance of character + 200) are also included. , The added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item, and the character effect pattern No. as the decision item. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. Also in these character type lottery tables (effect type E or F or K or L + added value by appearance of character +150) and character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value by appearance of character +200), The lottery value information is referred to according to the addition value (+50, +100, +150, +200) by the combo. In the character type lottery table on the upper side of FIG. 86 (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value by appearance of character + 150), when the added value is “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 23 (on cow character + additional character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, character effect pattern No. 24 (on the bull character + additional character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 100) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 25 (on the bull character + the youth character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, the character effect pattern No. 26 (on the bull character + additional character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table at the lower side of FIG. 86 (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value by appearance of character + 200), the character effect pattern No. 27 (upper cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and when the addition value is “+100”, the character effect pattern No. 28 (upper cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 100) is determined, and when the addition value is “+150”, the character effect pattern No. 29 (upper cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and when the addition value is “+200”, the character effect pattern No. 30 (upper cow character + middle-aged character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In these character type lottery tables, the character effect pattern is uniquely determined, but the character effect pattern may be determined without using a table or random number lottery processing. Also, a plurality of character effect patterns may be associated with each of the added values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

<Cow Character Revival Lottery Table>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a bull character revival lottery table. The bull character revival lottery table is a table that is referred to in a process (S581 in FIG. 131) included in the effect lottery determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the bull character revival lottery table, as the effect of the extra bonus, the aura color arranged in the background of the production button, the display size of the production button, and the bull character revival pattern No. indicating failure or revival as a result of the button operation. It is a table used in order to determine 1-7 based on production types A and I. The bull character revival lottery table includes the production types A and I as reference items and the bull character revival pattern No. as a decision item. 1 to 7 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a bull character revival pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the bull character revival lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the production types A and I.

  In the bull character revival lottery table, the bull character revival pattern No. One of 1 to 7 is determined by lottery. For example, in the production type A, the cow character revival pattern No. 1 to 4 are determined, and in the production type I, the cow character revival pattern No. One of 5 to 7 is determined.

<Additional bonus end screen lottery table>
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a bonus bonus end screen lottery table. The extra bonus end screen lottery table is a table that is referred to in the extra bonus end screen lottery process (S590 in FIG. 132) in the sub bonus 71 extra bonus end screen determination process described later. The extra bonus end screen lottery table includes an end display pattern No. indicating a display message after the end of the last substantial round of the extra bonus. 1 is a table used to determine 1 to 3 based on hit patterns 4 to 11. The extra bonus end screen lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 as reference items and end display pattern Nos. As determination items. 1 to 3 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the end display pattern by random lottery according to the reference item. In the extra bonus end screen lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the winning patterns 4 to 11.

  In the extra bonus end screen lottery table, the end display pattern No. is based on the winning patterns 4-11. One of 1 to 3 is determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, the end display pattern No. Any one of 1 to 3 is uniquely determined. In the extra bonus end screen lottery table, the end display pattern is uniquely determined according to the winning pattern, but the end display pattern is determined without using the table or random number lottery processing. May be. Further, a plurality of end display patterns may be associated with one hit pattern. Further, depending on the hit pattern, the end display pattern may not be determined. For example, in the case of the hit patterns 9 to 11, the end display pattern may not be determined.

<Title for determining the title>
FIG. 89 shows a title determination lottery table. The title determination lottery table is a table referred to in the additional bonus title determination process (S591 in FIG. 132) in the additional bonus end screen determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The title determination lottery table includes a title pattern No. indicating a title displayed at the end of the extra bonus (after displaying the extra bonus end screen). 1 is a table used for determining 1 to 5 based on the value of a cumulative payout prize ball counter described later. The title determination lottery table includes a value of a cumulative payout ball counter as a reference item and a title pattern No. as a determination item. 1 to 5 are specified. In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is selected according to the value of the cumulative payout ball counter. Any one of 1 to 5 is determined. The cumulative payout ball counter indicates the number of winning balls according to the actual round in the big hit game state (including the case of the consecutive resort described later) during the period from the start of the big hit game state to the transition to the non-probable non-temporal short game state. (Substantial number of rounds × upper limit prize ball number per round 100) is counted.

  In the title determination lottery table, for example, when the value of the cumulative payout ball counter is 4999 or less, the title pattern No. 1 (beginner) is decided, and this title pattern No. In response to 1, the title “Beginner” is added and displayed at the end of the bonus. In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. is uniquely determined according to the value of the cumulative payout ball counter. 1 to 5 are determined, but different title patterns may be determined even if the accumulated payout ball counter has the same value, for example.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
90 and 91 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 90, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power interruption detection state is present. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power interruption detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set, and the process proceeds to S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 91), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, it proceeds to S16. Move processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 91). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, moves the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display for notifying that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S24, where the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting 8000H in the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process for the work area when the RAM is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S <b> 35, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S <b> 36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the rendering condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening that is opened when the big hit or the small hit occurs. Grand prize opening time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that an illegal act has occurred The process of updating various timers is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. Although described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a winning determination random number value and a winning symbol determination random number value in accordance with detection signals from the first starting winning port switch 320 and the second starting winning port switch 330 and stores them in the main ROM 62. With reference to a big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big lot and small lottery lottery) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process in S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the winning symbol is used, and the result of the determination is stored. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, 3 times in 1.3 seconds, or 4 times in 1.4 seconds, or 6 times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing member 34 is opened, and when the wing member 34 is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 33. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 outputs a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for generating data related to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first start port switch 320 and the second switch detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 94) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated in accordance with the execution of the change display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process for storing in the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above-described steps. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs the security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and the LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A, and the second grand prize. Solenoid power is supplied to drive the solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 37A and the blade member 34. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main process, the main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in accordance with a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process in S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 starts from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a winning determination random number counter, a winning symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. I am trying to update with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area has detected a winning. For example, when detecting a winning, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won. The switch input process in S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won the first grand prize opening 36, the second big prize opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. If there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each win is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out a prize ball corresponding to a winning area whose bit is “1 (ON)” in accordance with the winning of a game ball from the payout device 83. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is finished, this timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 93, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times of execution (startup) of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of execution (startup) of the timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S <b> 72, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. The remaining ball monitoring timer is a ball path from the first big prize opening 36 to the first big prize opening count switch 360, or a ball path from the second big prize opening 37 to the second big prize opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual sphere remaining in the. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S77, and determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is not “0”. , The process is moved to S73. When the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” and the game is not in a round game, an error may be notified when the special winning opening count switch detects a game ball.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  In S74, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining again whether or not the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S77, and determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. , The process is moved to S75.

  In S75, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the specific area 38A is being opened. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, it moves the process to S77, and if it determines that the specific area 38A is open, it moves the process to S76.

  In S76, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. Thereby, the displacement member 39 is driven so that the specific region 38A is closed. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S77, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged after winning the second big prize opening 37. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, S78. Move processing to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (short time) is set in the residual sphere monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be the same or a larger value (long time).

  In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S <b> 79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. Moves the process to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” or “11”. The special winning opening opening number counter is a counter used for identifying the 1R-th or 11R-th opening / closing of the second big winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the number-of-opening counters of the big prize opening does not count the number of times the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are actually opened, but is incremented by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special prize opening number counter is neither “1” nor “11”, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S82, where the value of the special prize opening number counter is If it is determined that the value is “1” or “11”, the process proceeds to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, this timer update process routine is ended, and the control state flag indicates the process for opening the special prize opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The second grand prize opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second big winning opening 37 detected by the second big winning opening count switch 370. The discharged ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharged balls of game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is the same as the value of the discharge ball counter. In this process, when the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second big winning opening winning prize counter is If it is greater than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the second grand prize opening count switch 370 until it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. It corresponds to time. Therefore, when it is determined in this process that the value of the second big prize opening prize counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the ball inside the second big prize opening 37 is clogged, or the second largest due to the so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning mouth count switch 370 is detected.

  In S83, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the discharge is not normally performed. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second grand prize winning prize counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 94, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor that can detect radio waves (not shown), a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S91. If any of the sensors described above is in the detected state, an error notification may be given, and even if, for example, a big prize opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, the hit determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the normal RAM 63 normal Processing to store in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or the second When it is determined that there is an input from the start winning prize switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start opening winning counter is performed. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 95, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first big prize opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second big prize opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is finished.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 96, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a game ball winning in the first start port 32 has been detected based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start port When the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S111, and when the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the first starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first symbol symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and are obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 32 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  In S114, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S115.

  In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S <b> 116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing the winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for the effect when it is determined that the winning effect is obtained in the process of S115. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process is finished, the first start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 97, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second start port When the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S121, and when the bit of the second starting port winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the second starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the second starting port 33 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S <b> 126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is finished, the second start port switch check process routine is finished.

[First big prize exit switch check process]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first big prize opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 98, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a game ball winning in the first big winning opening 36 has been detected based on the detection signal from the first big winning opening count switch 360. Perform the process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S131 and detects the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36. If it is determined that it is not, the first big prize opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter. The first grand prize winning prize counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit number of winnings per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S <b> 132, the main CPU 61 sets the first grand prize winning prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first big prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the secondary control circuit 70, so that the secondary control circuit 70 makes a winning of the game ball to the first big prize opening 36. Become aware. Thereby, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout winning balls) displayed during the extra bonus is displayed in addition. When this process is finished, the first big prize opening switch check processing routine is finished.

[Second Grand Prize Exit Switch Check Processing]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second grand prize opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 99, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a game ball winning in the second big winning opening 37 has been detected based on the detection signal from the second big winning opening count switch 370. Perform the process. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second big winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S141 and detects the winning of the gaming ball to the second big winning opening 37. If it is determined not to be performed, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second big prize winning prize counter. The second grand prize opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S <b> 142, the main CPU 61 sets a second grand prize winning prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second grand prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the secondary control circuit 70, whereby the secondary control circuit 70 makes a winning of the game ball to the second big prize opening 37. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout winning balls) displayed during the extra bonus is additionally displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on a detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S144 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process proceeds to S152.

  In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S145.

  In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “1” or “11”. The big prize opening number counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is neither “1” nor “11”, the process proceeds to S152, and the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is If it is determined that the value is “1” or “11”, the process proceeds to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big winning opening, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S149, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening. ), If not, the process proceeds to S147.

  In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management waiting time management process before restarting the winning prize opening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is “05H” or “06H”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S148, and determines that the control status flag is neither “05H” nor “06H”. Moves the process to S152.

  In S <b> 148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than “0”, the process proceeds to S149, and when it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”. In step S152, the process proceeds to step S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”, it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may make it do.

  In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”. The specific area passing flag is an internal flag whose value is set to “01H” when a V winning of a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S152, and when it determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is not “01H”. , Processing proceeds to S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the specific area passing flag. The value “01H” of the specific area passing flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability-changing gaming state is determined after the end of the big hit gaming state.
If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passing command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S153 and determines that the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In the case, the process proceeds to S154.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B without the game ball being detected by the second grand prize opening count switch 370. judge. In this process, if the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second big winning opening switch check processing routine, and the second big winning prize opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. If this process ends, the process moves to S156.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second grand prize winning prize counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process is finished, the second big prize opening switch check process routine is finished. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 100, the numerical values shown from S161 to S168 are control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S161.

  In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. Details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the setting of S163 is performed. Details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of big hit or small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the setting of S164 is performed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S164.

  In S164, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 61 reads the second big prize read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening the mouth shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 91, the main CPU 61 reads out data for opening the second big prize opening shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 stored in the main RAM 63, A signal for opening the second big prize opening shutter 37A and a signal for opening the displacement member 39 are supplied to the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A and the displacement member solenoid 390. Accordingly, the main CPU 61 performs opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 37. In other words, a predetermined advantageous gaming state (a game in which the second big prize opening 37 is changed to a predetermined number of times between an open state in which a game ball is easily received and a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball as a period from the start of one round to an interval. A game state is executed in which one round game provided with (state) is repeated a predetermined number of times. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which only the second big prize opening 37 is opened / closed only once may be executed. In the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 37 is always opened and closed first, but the first big prize opening 36 may be opened and closed first, or the first The big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 may be arbitrarily selected and opened / closed.

  Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening time (for example, 27.834 seconds of the opening / closing pattern E per round) to the big prize opening time. Set to timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S166 may be performed. Details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed. The grand prize opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.834 s of opening / closing pattern E per round) in the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S166 may be performed. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for opening / closing the displacement member 39. Details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  In S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first big prize winning port 36 or the second big prize winning port 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value indicating the hit end interval (06H) in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before re-opening of the big winning opening if it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  In S167, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. Details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S168.

  In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. Details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flags to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ), (07H) in this order, the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 100 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or small hit. ) In order, the processing of S161, S162, and S163 shown in FIG. 100 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag in the order of (03H), (04H), (05H), so that FIG. The processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 100 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S173.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Thereby, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not “0”, that is, the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Move processing to.

  In S <b> 174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability-changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state as a special gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big-hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probable variable gaming state as a non-special gaming state that is less likely to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability-changing gaming state as the special gaming state.

  Note that the special game state is a probability change / short-time game state and the non-special game state is basically a non-probability change / non-time-short game state, but in this embodiment, the non-special game state includes a non-probability change game state and This includes cases where the game is in short-time gaming.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the jackpot probability due to winning in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be greater or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning in the second starting port 33. The jackpot probability due to winning at the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be greater or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning at the second starting port 33.

  Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination process of S178. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the gaming state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 61 extracts the special symbol starting storage area random number value extracted in the winning of the game ball and set in the second special symbol starting storage area (0), and the selected small hit determination table. refer. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value.

  In addition, since the small hit can occur only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination processing is performed only based on the random number value for the hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. You may make it perform a small hit determination process based on the random number value for a hit determination memorize | stored in the 1 special symbol starting storage area.

  As described above, in the process of S179, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is determined when both the big hit determination process of S178 and the small hit determination process of S179 are not won. Loss is determined as a game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S180.

  In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, and determines the small hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, for either the big hit or the small hit. If it is lost, a process of determining a lost symbol is performed. Details of S180 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S180, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S178 and S179, and the value of the probability variation counter. A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same in the ST gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the current variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S183.

  In step S183, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variation display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing special symbol determination processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S191. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S196.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S192 if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 is the value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S194.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the random number value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining whether the symbol is one of probability variation 1, probability variation 2, time reduction 1 or time reduction 2). If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 8) based on the random symbol value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the jackpot determination table. A process of determining which of the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 10 is a symbol) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S196, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S179 in FIG. 101) is a win for the small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S197 when the small win is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S201 when it is not the small win.

  In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the small bonus symbol of the second special symbol (the second special symbol small bonus symbol of FIG. 8) based on the random symbol value for winning symbol determination extracted from the big bonus symbol determination counter and the small hit determination table. A process of determining whether the symbol is a small winning symbol shown in the distribution) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S198.

  In S198, the main CPU 61 performs a data set for the small hit symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set for the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the small special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S199, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S200.

  In S200, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs data relating to the number of times of opening of the first prize winning opening 36 and the second winning prize opening 37 related to the number of times of opening of the first prize winning opening 36, that is, probability variation 1, probability variation 2, time reduction 1, time reduction according to the first special symbol. 2 or the processing of setting data corresponding to the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 10 according to the second special symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines in S201 that it is neither big hit in S190 nor small hit in S196, that is, it is a loss, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the lost symbol data of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value indicates the special symbol variation time management (01H), it moves the process to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S212, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S213.

  In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. The symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S <b> 214, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 104, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S223. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S224.

  In S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. The time-saving counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol fluctuation frequency) in the time-saving gaming state. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

  In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228.

  In step S227, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a time reduction end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the short time end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the short time gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation frequency) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229.

  In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S230.

  In S230, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied as a command indicating the game state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S234. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S238.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S235. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is 15498 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability 1”, and 11496 ms when the other big hit symbol is The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 11496 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 1”, 996 ms when “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 10”, and when it is the small hit symbol Is 3996 ms. As another example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol may be set to 3996 ms, which is the same as when the big hit symbol is “probability 10”, even when the big hit symbol is “small probability”.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a specific hit pattern as well as the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the data indicating the winning pattern included in the winning start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S243. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S245.

  In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the process to S244.

  In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S245.

  In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big win symbol or the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S245. If this process ends, the process moves to S246.

  In S <b> 246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S247.

  In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S248.

  In S <b> 248, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S249.

  In S249, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the discharge ball counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S250.

  In S <b> 250, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 27.222 s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the special winning opening opening number counter (for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is “probability 1”). If this process ends, the process moves to S251.

  In S <b> 251, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37. The variable stored in this way is to drive the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37. Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In this embodiment, in the case of the 1R game in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the second big prize opening 37 is always opened, and therefore data for opening the second big prize opening 37 is set. The Further, here, data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set, but data for opening and closing the specific area 38A may be set in other processing.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before reopening the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

  In S <b> 262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S <b> 263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S264.

  In S 264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S265.

  In S <b> 265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S266.

  In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S267.

  In S <b> 267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S268.

  In S <b> 268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before reopening the big prize opening is finished.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the special prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 107, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main routine for opening the special prize opening is ended.

  In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to S274. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “10” or more, it moves the process to S272.

  In S272, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the type of jackpot and the current round, and moves the process to S273.

  In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the big winning opening opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine for opening the special winning opening.

  In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way is to close the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual sphere monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S <b> 276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed big prize opening is the second big prize opening 37. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big prize opening is the second big prize opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big prize opening is not the second big prize opening 37, that is, the first big prize opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S278.

  In S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S278.

  In S278, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S283. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of large winning opening open (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. Here, the upper limit value of the number of times the special winning opening is opened is, for example, 16R if “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 5” of the second special symbol. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the process proceeds to S283. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S280.

  In S280, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In addition, although the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b is set as the interval display time between rounds, a time different from these may be set. If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening a big winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S <b> 282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S283, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S284. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”, “time reduction 1”, “ In the case of “short time 2”, it is 12312 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 4”, In the case of “probability variation 6”, it is 12312 ms, “probability variation 5”, “probability variation 7” to “probability variation 10”, and in the case of a small hit symbol, it is 4500 ms. As another example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 4500 ms or less for all the big bonus symbols, and the big hit gaming state related to the second special symbol is more final than the first special symbol. The time from the end of the round to the end of the big hit gaming state may be shortened.

  In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S285.

  In S285, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The winning end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, it moves the process to S292. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

  In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passing flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passing flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S297.

  In S <b> 294, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “02H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “02H” indicates a probability change game state and a short-time game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S295.

  In S <b> 295, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “190” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S296.

  In S <b> 296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “00H” in the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299.

  In S 297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “01H” indicates a non-probable change gaming state and a short-time gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S298.

  In S <b> 298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “4” or “100” as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299. When “4” is set as the number of time reductions, it is only when the jackpot symbol is “time reduction 1” in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state in other situations Is set to “100” as the number of time reductions.

  In S299, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command that includes information indicating the type of gaming state that has been completed (big hit, small hit) in addition to information indicating the gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state and the remaining number of times as a short time. is there. The remaining number of time reductions is also referred to as the remaining time reduction number as described later, and means the time reduction number of “4” or “100” set in the process of S298. In other words, the remaining number of time reductions (remaining short time number) does not mean the time reduction number remaining at an arbitrary time in the time reduction mode, but merely indicates the time reduction number remaining at the start of the time reduction mode. The gaming state command including information such as the remaining number of times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S301, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initialization in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S311.

  In S <b> 311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S312.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for display in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) receives various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and rendering image data based on data for displaying the rendering image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S314.

  In S <b> 314, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10 a, 10 b, and 10 c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S315.

  In step S <b> 315, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S316.

  In step S <b> 316, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process moves to S311 and thereafter the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 71 is executing the main process, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute a command reception interrupt process or a timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 111 and the timer interrupt process with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this processing, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis processing of FIG. 116 and FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S322.

  In step S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this process is finished, the command reception interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S332. The timer update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115.

  In step S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. If this process ends, the process moves to S333. The pressing operation button operation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Press operation button operation determination processing]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the pressing operation button operation determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This pressing operation button operation determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 113, in S340, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the validity period timer is “0”. The effective period timer is a timer for measuring the effective period of the button operation. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the validity period timer is “0”, this sub-operation button operation determination processing routine ends. If it is determined that the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S341.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been operated. If it is determined that the pressing operation button 9A has been operated, the process proceeds to S342. When it is determined that the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, this pressing operation button operation determination processing routine is ended.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the selected effect image is being displayed. The selected effect image is an image that is displayed when the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H” and the value of the round counter is “1” or “2”. The hit effect pattern flags are internal flags indicating the hit patterns 1 to 13, and hit effect pattern flags “01H” to “0DH” are set corresponding to the hit patterns 1 to 13, respectively. “01H” corresponds to the super big bonus, “02H” and “03H” correspond to the challenge bonus, “04H” to “0BH” correspond to the extra bonus, and “0CH” and “0DH” It corresponds to V challenge. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time a round game is executed (every time the winning prize opening display command is received), and the number of currently executed rounds (round games executed). This is a counter for indicating the number of times of the winning prize opening opening number counter used for the main CPU 61. Thereby, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the 1R or 2R of the challenge bonus. If the selected effect image is being displayed and it is determined that the challenge bonus is the first or second R of the challenge bonus, the process proceeds to S343. If it is determined that the selected effect image is not being displayed and it is not the 1R and 2R eyes of the challenge bonus, the process proceeds to S344.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge bonus type flag change process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing a challenge bonus type flag indicating the type of challenge bonus. The challenge bonus type flag is set to “01H” for a single challenge bonus game, set to “02H” for a challenge bonus three-time challenge, and set to “03H” for a challenge bonus surprise, in S343 The sub CPU 71 changes the value of the currently set challenge bonus type flag to another value. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S <b> 344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not an effect image of “Combo RUSH” is being displayed. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect image of “Combo RUSH” is being displayed based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag, the value of the scenario number flag, the value of the round counter, and the bonus scenario table for addition. Determine. The scenario number flag is an internal flag set corresponding to the scenario number. If it is determined that the effect image “combo RUSH” is being displayed, the process proceeds to S345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect image of “combo RUSH” is not being displayed, the process proceeds to S350.

  In S345, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the operation number counter. The operation number counter is a counter for counting the number of operations of the pressing operation button 9A. If this process ends, the process moves to S346.

  In S346, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the operation number counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the operation counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S347. If it is determined that the value of the operation counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S351.

  In S347, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the addition counter. The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of additions of the additional number in the combo RUSH until reaching the upper limit. If this process ends, the process moves to S348.

  In S348, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S350. If it is determined that the value of the addition counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S349.

  In S349, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. During the extra bonus, a predetermined value may be repeatedly set in the operation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S351. Here, the “predetermined value” set in the operation number counter is a value determined with reference to the combo RUSH lottery table of FIG.

  In S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the value of the validity period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S351.

  In S351, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect control process for displaying the effect image after the button operation according to the effect data set in the process described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls an effect corresponding to the operation of the push-down operation button 9A in an effect mode such as a challenge bonus or an extra bonus. If this process ends, the process moves to S352.

  In S352, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not an addition effect has been executed. The added effect is an effect in which the value added as the number of additions is displayed on the screen. If the effect is to display an added value corresponding to the number, the effect is added. If the effect is based on the effect type F, the addition effect is not executed. As a result, the number of extras shown in the “character” and “combo” of the production type F in the extra bonus scenario table is added by the execution of the production based on the production type G in the next round (next substantial round). It should be noted that the additional numbers shown in the “character” and “combo” of the effect type F may also be added and displayed by the processing of S352. If it is determined that the addition effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S353. If it is determined that the addition effect has not been executed, this pressing operation button operation determination processing routine is terminated.

  In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. The total prize ball counter is a counter for counting the total number of prize balls. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions indicated by “character”, “combo”, and “RUSH” based on the effect type defined in the extra bonus scenario table to the total prize ball counter. When this process ends, the pressing operation button operation determination process routine ends. In addition, since the next round becomes the production type G in the next round, the additional numbers shown in “character” and “combo” of the production type F are added together at that time. Further, the display content of a red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like), which will be described later, for displaying the total number of winning balls is updated based on the total prize ball counter. The display content update timing is not the timing at which the additional number is added to the total prize ball counter, but an addition effect for the additional number is executed, and then the additional number is actually added to the total prize ball counter. After.

[Timer update processing]
114 and 115 are flowcharts showing timer update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 114, in S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the warning notification timer is “0”. The warning notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for starting the warning display for prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S364. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S361.

  In S361, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the warning notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S362.

  In S362, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining again whether or not the value of the warning notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S363. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S364.

  In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” as a warning flag. The warning flag is a flag indicating that warning display for prompting V winning in the specific area 38A is started, and in the case of “01H”, this is indicated. If this process ends, the process moves to S364.

  In S364, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. The discharge error notification timer is a timer for measuring a time for performing notification of a discharge error. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S368. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S365.

  In S365, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the discharge error notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S366.

  In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining again whether the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S367. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S368.

  In S367, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the discharge error notification flag. The discharge error notification flag is a flag indicating that a discharge error is to be notified. When “00H”, the discharge error is not notified (terminated), and when “01H”, a discharge error is notified. Notification will be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S368.

  In S368, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S372. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S369.

  In S369, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S370.

  In S370, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the valid period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S371. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S372.

  In S371, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect control process for displaying the effect image after the button operation according to the effect data set in the process described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls an effect corresponding to the operation of the push-down operation button 9A in an effect mode such as a challenge bonus or an extra bonus. If this process ends, the process moves to S372.

  In S <b> 372, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”. The valid period preparation timer is a timer for measuring the time until the operation of the push button 9A can be input as valid. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S376 in FIG. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S373.

  In S373, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the valid period preparation timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S374.

  In S374, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S375 in FIG. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S376 in FIG.

  In S375, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value when the value of the effective period preparation timer set at the time of various effects becomes “0”. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, is set in the effective period timer, but the value set according to the production pattern may be varied. Incidentally, for example, a value corresponding to 3 s is set for the effective period preparation timer, a value corresponding to 5 s is set when the character appears, and a value corresponding to 6 s is set when the bull character is revitalized. A value corresponding to 4 s is set at the time of a surprise effect.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in S376, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not an addition effect has been executed. This process is determined based on whether or not the effect executed in the previous process (S371) was an addition effect, similar to the process in S352 of FIG. If it is determined that the addition effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S377. If it is determined that the addition effect is not executed, the process proceeds to S378.

  In S377, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions indicated by “character”, “combo”, and “RUSH” based on the effect type defined in the extra bonus scenario table to the total prize ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S378. In this process as well, the additional numbers shown in the “character” and “combo” of the effect type F are not added, and the next round becomes the effect type G. It will be.

  In S378, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. The addition effect execution timer is a timer that is set when the effect corresponding to the effect type M is executed, and the value of the timer is “0” when the reverse effect based on the effect type M is executed. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S379. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S382.

  In S379, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the addition effect execution timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S380.

  In S380, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S381. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S382.

  In S381, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding based on the effect type M so that the value of the total prize ball counter becomes “1500”. Thereby, according to the process of S381, the effect control process for displaying the image of the reverse effect according to the effect type M or adding and displaying so that the total number of winning balls is “1500” by the added number is executed. The If this process ends, the process moves to S382. This processing also updates the display content of a red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later for displaying the total number of winning balls based on the total winning ball counter. The update timing of the display content of the red meter display unit 910 is not the timing at which the additional number is added to the total prize ball counter, but an effect of adding the additional number is executed, and then the additional number is added to the total prize ball counter. Is after the actual addition.

  In S382, the sub CPU 71 performs other timer update processing. When this process is finished, the timer update process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
116 and 117 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, it moves the process to S391. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392.

  In step S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in step S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S393. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the variation pattern designation command as the read command, it moves the process to S394.

  In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the decorative symbol variation display mode is determined. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S395. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S396.

  In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) have a predetermined number (for example, three (3 When the digits)) are aligned with the same decorative symbols (numbers), the game will basically shift to the big hit gaming state. Specifically, “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “time reduction 1”, “time reduction 2” as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, “probability change 1” to “probability change” as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol With respect to the symbol “10” and the small hit symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” is the same as the number “3” or “7”, “probability variation 2” to “probability variation 9”, “time reduction 1”, The decorative symbol corresponding to “2” is the combination of the numbers “1”, “2”, “4” to “6”, “probability 10” and the small hit symbol symbol as a combination of specific symbols. The decorative pattern corresponding to the specific appearance and losing of the number “135” is a non-specific appearance.

  In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S397. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S399.

  In step S <b> 397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decoration symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S398.

  In S398, the sub CPU 71 executes special mode processing. This special mode process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S399, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S400. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S402.

  In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. The winning effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S400.

  In S401, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. This winning start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S402, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening winning command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a grand prize winning command as the read command, it moves the process to S403. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the big prize opening prize command as the read command, it moves the process to S404.

  In S403, the sub CPU 71 executes prize ball counter addition processing. This prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a specific area passing command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S405. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S406.

  In S405, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning notification process. The V winning notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S406, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that an inter-round display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S407. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that an inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S408.

  In S407, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. This inter-round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S <b> 408, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S <b> 391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a command display during opening of a special winning opening as a read command, it moves the process to S409. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the winning prize opening opening display command as the read command, it moves the process to S410 in FIG.

  In S409, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. This in-round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S410 of FIG. 117, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S411. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S412.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This winning end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S412, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S413. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S414.

  In S413, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode change process. This effect mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a short time end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a short time end command as the read command, it moves the process to S415. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the time-shutdown command as the read command, it moves the process to S416.

  In S415, the sub CPU 71 executes a time saving mode end process. The short time mode end process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S416, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a probability variation end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S417. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S418.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 executes ST mode end processing. This ST mode end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S418, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a discharge error command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a discharge error command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S419. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S420.

  In S419, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. This discharge error notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S420, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Special mode processing]
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing special mode processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This special mode process is a process for ending the special mode as the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 118, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode “00H”, a value corresponding to the special mode “01H”, a value corresponding to the short mode “02H”, and a value corresponding to the long mode. The value corresponding to “03H” and the ST mode is “04H”. Depending on the value of such an effect mode flag, the background image and the effect contents differ. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S431. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “01H”, the special mode processing routine is ended.

  In S431, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the special mode counter. The special mode counter is a counter for counting the number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the special mode up to a set predetermined number (for example, 10 times). If this process ends, the process moves to S432.

  In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special mode counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special mode counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special mode counter is not “0”, the special mode processing routine is terminated.

  In step S433, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the effect mode flag to “00H” and ends the special mode processing routine. That is, the effect mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode by the process of S433.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This winning effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a challenge bonus or an extra bonus as an effect mode in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “0DH” to the winning effect pattern flag according to the special symbol stop symbol designation information included in the received winning start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S441, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a challenge bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”, the process proceeds to S442. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is neither “02H” nor “03H”, the process proceeds to S443.

  In S442, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge bonus determination process. This challenge bonus determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”, the process proceeds to S444. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH”, the winning effect pattern determination processing routine is ended.

  In S444, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus determination process. This additional bonus determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Challenge bonus decision process]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a challenge bonus determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the challenge bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in S450, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge success / failure lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the challenge success / failure lottery table, and determines the challenge success / failure pattern No. based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag and the extracted random number. Determine one of 1-3. If this process ends, the process moves to S451.

  In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the lottery result of S450 (challenge success / failure patterns No. 1 to 3) as the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. That is, challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 to 3 are determined, challenge success / failure pattern flags “01H” to “03H” are set as internal flags corresponding to each. If this process ends, the process moves to S452.

  In S452, the sub CPU 71 executes a single game effect determination process. This single game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S453.

  In S453, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge effect determination process three times. This three-time challenge effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S454.

  In S454, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise effect determination process. This surprise effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the challenge bonus determination process routine is finished.

[Single-game production decision processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a single game effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This single-game effect determination process is a process for determining the contents of a single-game effect as the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 121, in S460, the sub CPU 71 executes a single-game combination lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the single game combination lottery table and determines a single game combination pattern as an effect pattern based on the challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random number. To do. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined single-game combination pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S461.

  In S461, the sub CPU 71 executes a Janken pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the Janken pattern lottery table, and determines the Janken pattern as an effect pattern based on the stored single-game combination pattern number stored in S460 and the extracted random number. . The sub CPU 71 stores the determined Janken pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is finished, the one-game effect determination process routine is finished.

[3rd challenge production decision process]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a three-time challenge effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This three-time challenge effect determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the three-time challenge as the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in S470, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge lottery process three times. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the three-time challenge lottery table, and determines a three-time challenge pattern as an effect pattern based on the challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined three-time challenge pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is finished, the challenge effect determination process routine is finished three times.

[Surprise production decision process]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a surprise effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The surprise effect determination process is a process for determining the contents of the surprise effect as the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 123, in S480, the sub CPU 71 executes a success notification round lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the success notification round lottery table and determines the success notification round based on the determined challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random number. If this process ends, the process moves to S481.

  In S481, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the lottery result in S480 as a success notification round flag. The success notification round flag is an internal flag indicating the determined challenge success round. The success notification round flag has a value corresponding to each of the 3R to 8R corresponding to the success notification round from “03H” to “08H”. When there is no success notification round, the value of the corresponding success notification round flag is “02H”. Is set as If this process ends, the process moves to S482.

  In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “3” as the value of the surprise effect counter. The surprise effect counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the 3rd to 8R eyes when determining the 3R to 8R effect patterns in the surprise as the effect mode. In the present embodiment, “3” is set as the initial value of the surprise effect counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S483.

  In S483, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a surprise pattern lottery according to whether the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round (whether it matches the value of the success notification round flag). One of the surprise patterns is determined as an effect pattern based on the round in which the surprise pattern is executed with reference to one of the tables and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined surprise pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S484.

  In step S <b> 484, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not a surprise pattern for the success notification round has been determined. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter matches the value of the success round flag. In this embodiment, when the surprise pattern corresponding to the success notification round is determined, the lottery of the surprise pattern corresponding to the round after the success notification round is not performed. You may make it perform the lottery of the surprise pattern corresponding to a round. If it is determined that the surprise pattern for the success notification round has been determined, the process proceeds to S487. On the other hand, if it is determined not to determine the surprise pattern for the success notification round, the process proceeds to S485.

  In S485, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter is “8”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a surprise pattern has been determined for all the 3rd to 8R rounds. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is “8”, the process proceeds to S487. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not “8”, the process proceeds to S486.

  In S486, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the surprise effect counter. In this way, by repeating the process of S483, a surprise pattern in the 3R to 8R rounds is determined. Instead of determining the surprise pattern for each 1R, the surprise pattern may be collectively determined for the 3rd to 8R rounds according to the winning pattern. If this process ends, the process moves to S483.

  In S487, the sub CPU 71 executes icon determination processing. This icon determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S488.

  In S488, the sub CPU 71 executes a character band effect determination process. This character band effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the surprise effect determination process routine ends.

[Icon determination processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing icon determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This icon determination process is a process for determining the production contents using the icons displayed on the screen, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 124, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “8” to the value of the surprise effect counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets “8” as the value of the surprise effect counter in order to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to change the icon pattern from the 8R-th icon. If this process ends, the process moves to S491.

  In S491, the sub CPU 71 executes an icon pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter, stores the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored based on the process of S483 in FIG. 123, and the extracted random number. Based on the above, an icon pattern that finally changes is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined icon pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S492.

  In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether an icon color other than a white icon has been determined as the icon color to be finally displayed in the process of S491. If it is determined that an icon color other than the white icon has been finally determined, the process proceeds to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that no icon other than the white icon is finally determined as the icon color to be displayed, that is, it is determined that the white icon is determined, the process proceeds to S497.

  In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “4” to the value of the icon counter. The icon counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the 4Rth to the xRth when determining the icon pattern from the 4Rth to the xRth which is determined to be displayed in the end except for the white icon. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an icon pattern (icon display color) from the 4Rth to the xRth which is determined to be the final display of icons other than the white icon according to the lottery result of S491. ) Is determined as an initial value “4”. If this process ends, the process moves to S494.

  In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes an icon change lottery process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the icon change lottery table corresponding to the round according to the value of the icon counter, and based on the finally changed icon pattern (for example, “red icon”) and the extracted random number. To determine the icon pattern after the change. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined changed icon pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the changing round. If this process ends, the process moves to S495.

  In S495, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the icon counter matches the value of the surprise effect counter. If it is determined that the value of the icon counter matches the value of the surprise effect counter, the process proceeds to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the icon counter does not match the value of the surprise effect counter, the process proceeds to S496.

  In step S496, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding 1 to the value of the icon counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S494. Thereby, according to execution of a round, the change aspect (icon pattern) of the said icon display color until the corresponding icon lose | disappears can be determined.

  In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter is “4”. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the icon pattern corresponding to the 4Rth eye has been determined. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the icon pattern change mode has been determined for all the rounds in which the icon pattern may change. In this process, when it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is “4”, the icon determination process routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not “4”, the process proceeds to S498.

  In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the surprise effect counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S491.

[Text band effect determination processing]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a character band effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This character band effect determination process is a process for determining the effect contents using the character band displayed on the screen, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 125, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the surprise effect counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets “3” as the value of the surprise effect counter in order to display the character band (character message) from the 3Rth. If this process ends, the process moves to S501.

  In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round. If it is determined that the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round, the process proceeds to S502. If it is determined that the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter does not correspond to the success notification round, the process proceeds to S503.

  In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise success character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the surprise success character band lottery table, and creates an effect pattern based on the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 and the extracted random number. Determine the character band pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. If this process ends, the process moves to S503.

  In S503, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current round is the surprise pattern “none”, that is, the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process in S483 is “none” (FIG. 23 is performed to determine whether or not it corresponds to the surprise pattern No. 1) defined in the surprise pattern lottery table of No. 23. If it is determined that the surprise pattern is “none”, the process proceeds to S505. If it is determined that the surprise pattern is not “none”, the process proceeds to S504.

  In S504, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise failure character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 creates a surprise failure character band lottery table corresponding to the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 in association with the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter. The character band pattern as the effect pattern is determined based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. If this process ends, the process moves to S512.

  In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise gasset character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 associates the determination result (icon pattern number) stored in the icon change lottery process of S494 with the icon display color in association with the next round of the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter. If the change indicates a change, the surprise gasse character band lottery table corresponding to the changed icon color is referred to. If not changed, the surprise gase character band lottery table related to the white icon is referred. When the 8R character band is determined, 9R is regarded as a white icon and the character band is determined. In this way, referring to the corresponding surprise gasset character band lottery table, the character band pattern as the effect pattern is determined based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. If this process ends, the process moves to S506.

  In step S <b> 506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for determining whether or not a winning character band is won. If the number of the character band pattern determined in the surprise gasset character band lottery process of S505 is “No. 1 to 10”, the Gase character band is won. If it is determined that the character character band is won, the process proceeds to S507. If it is determined that the character character band is not won, the process proceeds to S512.

  In step S <b> 507, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “1” to the value of the subsequent character band counter. The subsequent character band counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the display frequency of the character band to be displayed after the display of the character character band. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets “1” as the value of the subsequent character band counter in order to determine the first character band after the display of the character character band. If this process ends, the process moves to S508.

  In S508, the sub CPU 71 executes a subsequent character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the surprise gasset subsequent character band lottery table and determines a character band pattern as an effect pattern based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. If this process ends, the process moves to S509.

  In step S509, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the previous and current character bands are the same. That is, the sub CPU 71 has the same determination result (character band pattern number) stored corresponding to the current round and the determination result (character band pattern number) stored corresponding to the previous round. If there is, it is determined that the previous and current character bands are the same. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the previous and current character bands are the same, the sub CPU 71 discards the determination result stored corresponding to the current round and determines the character band pattern again. , The process proceeds to S508, and the subsequent character band lottery process is executed again. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the previous and current character bands are not the same, the process proceeds to S510. Even if the previous and current character bands are the same, the subsequent character band lottery process may not be executed again.

  In S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the subsequent character band counter is “6”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not six subsequent character bands have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the subsequent character band counter is “6”, the process proceeds to S512. If it is determined that the value of the subsequent character band counter is not “6”, the process proceeds to S511. Note that the following character band may be determined to be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  In step S511, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the subsequent character band counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S508.

  In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the surprise effect counter is “8”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the 3R-8R character band patterns have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is “8”, the character band effect determination processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not “8”, the process proceeds to S513.

  In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the surprise effect counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S501. Note that the character band pattern corresponding to the round after the success notification round is not determined by such a series of processes, but may be determined. For example, if the hold information includes information indicating a big win, the rounds after the success notification round are also determined in association with the character band pattern, and the hold information includes information indicating the big win If not, the character band pattern may not be determined for rounds after the success notification round.

[Addition bonus determination process]
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an extra bonus determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus determination process is a process for determining the extra bonus production contents as the production mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 126, in S520, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus hold continuous determination process. This additional bonus reservation sequence determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S521.

  In S521, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus scenario type determination process. This additional bonus scenario type determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S522.

  In S522, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus initial process. This additional bonus initial process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S523.

  In S523, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus effect determination process. This additional bonus effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S524.

  In S524, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus end screen determination process. This extra bonus end screen determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the extra bonus determination process routine is finished.

[Additional bonus hold consecutive decision processing]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an extra bonus hold continuous determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus reservation series determination process is for determining whether or not to perform an effect suggesting whether or not the information indicating the winning of the big hit is included in the holding information related to the second special symbol during the extra bonus. This process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 127, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the hold information counter. The hold information counter is a counter for indicating an area number corresponding to the storage area of the work RAM 73 in which the hold information of the second special symbol is stored. If this process ends, the process moves to S531. Note that the hold information corresponds to the start-up storage stored in the main RAM 63, and up to four pieces are stored, and the value (area number) of the hold information counter increases according to the storage order of the hold information. Further, every time a start winning command is received, information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number included in the starting winning command are stored as hold information. The hold information corresponding to the first special symbol and the hold information corresponding to the second special symbol are individually stored in predetermined areas prepared in the work RAM 73, respectively. Such hold information is erased from the storage area according to the type of special symbol included in the change pattern designation command every time a change pattern designation command is received, but the hold information is erased based on other commands. You may be made to do.

  In S531, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not there is pending information in the storage area corresponding to the value of the pending information counter. In this process, if it is determined that there is pending information, the process proceeds to S532. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hold information, the process proceeds to S535. In this process, when the value of the hold information counter is “5”, it is determined that there is no hold information.

  In S532, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hold information includes information indicating a winning (big hit or small win). Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the information indicating the winning determination random number included in the hold information is information indicating winning in the probability variation gaming state. If it is determined that the information indicating the winning win is included, the process proceeds to S532. If it is determined that the information indicating the winning win is not included, the process proceeds to S530. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the information indicating the winning symbol is included, the sub CPU 71 determines the type of the winning symbol based on the information indicating the winning symbol determining random number.

  In S533, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus reservation continuous lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the extra bonus reservation lottery table and determines either non-winning or winning based on the winning symbol and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores a number corresponding to the determined non-winning or winning in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S534.

  In S534, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the additional bonus hold consecutive lottery process in S533 is a win. If it is determined that the bonus bonus lottery processing result is winning, the process proceeds to S535. If it is determined that the bonus bonus lottery processing result is not winning, the process proceeds to S530. In this process, if it is determined that the winning is made, the sub CPU 71 sets data corresponding to the special BGM so that the BGM output at the time of the extra bonus is different from the normal extra bonus. The timing for outputting the special BGM may be any timing as long as the bonus is being added. Further, even after it is determined that the winning is made in the process of S534, the processes after S532 may be performed on the remaining hold information. At this time, if the winning is further performed in the process of S534, data for outputting a BGM different from the special BGM may be set.

  In S535, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the hold information counter. When this process is finished, the bonus reserve continuous determination process routine is finished.

[Addition bonus scenario type determination process]
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus scenario type determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus scenario type determination process is a process for determining an additional bonus scenario, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 128, in S540, the sub CPU 71 executes a scenario group lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario group lottery table and determines the scenario groups A to D based on the winning pattern (the value of the winning effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. If this process ends, the process moves to S541.

  In S541, the sub CPU 71 executes a scenario type lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario type lottery table corresponding to the winning pattern (the value of the winning effect pattern flag), and determines the scenario type based on the scenario group determined in S540 and the extracted random number. decide. If this process ends, the process moves to S542.

  In S542, the sub CPU 71 executes a scenario number lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario number lottery table corresponding to the scenario type determined in S541, and determines the scenario number based on the scenario type and the extracted random number. If this process ends, the process moves to S543.

  In S543, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the determined scenario number in the scenario number flag. Specifically, for example, when the determined scenario type and scenario number are “Aa” and “No. 1 to 65”, the sub CPU 71 sets “01H” to “41H” in the scenario number flag. Similarly, “Ab” and “No. 1 to 39” set “42H” to “68H”, and “Ac” and “No. 1 to 7” set “69H” to “6FH”. , “Ba” and “No. 1 to 64” set “70H” to “AFH”, and “Bb” and “No. 1 to 23” set “B0H” to “C7H”. In “Bc” and “No. 1 to 4”, “C8H” to “CBH” are set, and in “Ca” and “No. 1 to 11”, “CCH” to “D6H” are set, and “Cb” In “No. 1 to 4”, “D7H” to “DAH” are set, and in “Da” and “No. 1 to 6”, “DBH” to “E0H” are set. If this process ends, the process moves to S544.

  In S544, the sub CPU 71 executes a combo RUSH lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines that “combo RUSH” (effect type G) is defined in the scenario corresponding to the value of the scenario number flag (the effect content in the actual round of the additional bonus) in the additional bonus scenario table. In order to request a button operation during the production of the “combo RUSH”, a required number of operations is determined by lottery. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 refers to the combo RUSH lottery table, and determines an operation frequency pattern based on a value (addition number) to be added according to “combo RUSH” and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the operation number pattern number as a determination result in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is terminated, the bonus scenario type determination process routine is terminated.

[Addition bonus initial processing]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an extra bonus initial process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus initial process is a process for determining the initial contents of the extra bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 129, in S550, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus roulette lottery process. This extra bonus roulette lottery process is a process for determining the initial value of the extra number given to the first bonus of the extra bonus. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the roulette lottery table, extracts an initial value to be added as an additional number in the 1R of the scenario corresponding to the value of the scenario number flag (the contents of the effect in the actual round of the extra bonus), and extraction An initial value pattern is determined based on the random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined initial value pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S551. The initial value pattern may be determined without using a table or a random number.

  In S551, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus roulette pattern lottery process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the roulette pattern lottery table, and based on the initial value pattern number stored in the bonus bonus roulette lottery processing in S550 and the extracted random number, the sub CPU 71 determines the roulette pattern as the effect pattern. decide. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined roulette pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S552.

  In S552, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus title determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the title determination lottery table and determines a title pattern as an effect pattern based on the winning pattern (the value of the winning effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined title pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus initial process routine is finished.

[Additional bonus production decision processing]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an extra bonus effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus production determination process is a process for determining the production contents of the extra bonus production, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 130, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the character type determination counter. The character type determination counter is a counter for counting up to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of real rounds corresponding to the big hit gaming state executed in determining the character type. If this process ends, the process moves to S561.

  In S561, the sub CPU 71 executes effect lottery determination processing. In this process, the character effect pattern for each round is determined. The effect lottery determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S562.

  In S562, the sub CPU 71 executes a chance-up lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the chance-up lottery table and determines a chance-up pattern as an effect pattern based on the character effect pattern number determined in the effect lottery determination process of S561 and the extracted random number. decide. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined chance-up pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual target round. If this process ends, the process moves to S563. In the process of S562, the chance-up pattern is not determined for the character effect patterns corresponding to the effect types A, B, G, I, M, and N other than the effect types C to F, H, and J to L. However, for the character effect patterns corresponding to these effect types, the chance-up pattern may be determined in the process of S562.

  In S563, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the character type determination counter is a value corresponding to the actual upper limit round (the round corresponding to the upper limit of the actual round). That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the contents of the effect in all substantial rounds in the extra bonus have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the character type determination counter is a value corresponding to the actual upper limit round, this extra bonus effect determination processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the character type determination counter is not a value corresponding to the actual upper limit round, the process proceeds to S564.

  In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the character type determination counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S561.

[Production lottery determination process]
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an effect lottery determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect lottery determination process is a process for determining a character effect pattern according to the effect type, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 131, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the substantial round that is the current target is “C” or “H”. The effect type is determined based on the value of the scenario number flag (scenario number), the added bonus scenario table, and the value of the character type determination counter (actual round targeted this time). In the following steps, the effect type is similarly determined. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is “C” or “H”, the process proceeds to S571. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not “C” or “H” this time, the process proceeds to S572.

  In S571, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), and based on the effect type (C or H) and the extracted random number, the character effect corresponding to the target real round this time. Determine the pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S <b> 572, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the substantial round that is the current target is “D” or “J”. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round this time is “D” or “J”, the process proceeds to S573. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not “D” or “J”, the process proceeds to S578.

  In S573, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the upper limit value of the total number of winning balls (in this embodiment, “1500” corresponding to the total number) has been reached. This determination is defined as the actual round of the current target based on the value of the scenario number flag (scenario number), the added bonus scenario table, and the value of the character type determination counter (the actual target round). This is done by determining whether or not the total number of winning balls is “1500”. If it is determined that the upper limit of the total number of winning balls has been reached, the process proceeds to S574. If it is determined that the upper limit value of the total number of winning balls has not been reached, the process proceeds to S575.

  In step S574, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (reaching type D or J + upper limit reached), and based on the added number (added value) corresponding to “character” and the extracted random number, The character effect pattern corresponding to the actual round is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In step S <b> 575, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the substantial round to be processed next time is “F”. If it is determined that the effect type of the next real round is “F”, the process proceeds to S576. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not “F” this time, the process proceeds to S577.

  In S576, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + effect type F of the next round), and based on the added number (addition value) corresponding to “character” and the extracted random number. Then, the character effect pattern corresponding to the target real round is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S577, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (except for the effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round), and based on the added number (added value) corresponding to “character” and the extracted random number. Thus, the character effect pattern corresponding to the actual target round is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S578, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the effect type of the substantial round that is the current target is “E”, “F”, “K”, or “L”. If it is determined that the production type of the target real round is “E”, “F”, “K”, or “L”, the process proceeds to S579. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not “E”, “F”, “K”, or “L”, the process proceeds to S580.

  In S579, the sub CPU 71 determines the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to character appearance + 50 based on the additional number (added value) corresponding to the “character” in the current target round. ˜ + 200) is determined, and the character effect pattern of the current real round is determined based on the additional number (added value) corresponding to “combo” and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character effect pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S580, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect type of the substantial round that is the current target is “A” or “I”. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round this time is “A” or “I”, the process proceeds to S581. If it is determined that the effect type of the target real round is not “A” or “I”, the effect lottery determination process routine is terminated.

  In S581, the sub CPU 71 refers to the bull character revival lottery table, and determines the bull character revival pattern in the current target round based on the effect type (A or I) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined bull character revival pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the actual round of the current target.

[Addition bonus end screen decision processing]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an extra bonus end screen determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus end screen determination process is a process for determining the contents of the extra bonus end screen, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 132, in S590, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus end screen lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an end display pattern to be displayed at the end of the last substantial round in the extra bonus. The sub CPU 71 refers to the bonus bonus end screen lottery table and determines the end display pattern based on the winning pattern (the value of the winning effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined end display pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S591. Note that the end display pattern may be determined without using a table or a random number. In the present embodiment, the end display pattern is determined at the start of the jackpot gaming state regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) in the jackpot gaming state. The end display pattern may be determined according to the number of winning balls counted during the big hit gaming state.

  In S591, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus title determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a title pattern to be displayed at the hit end interval in the extra bonus. The sub CPU 71 refers to the title determination lottery table, and based on the value obtained by adding a value corresponding to the total number defined in the additional bonus scenario table to the current accumulated payout ball counter value, A title pattern as a production pattern is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined title pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is finished, the extra bonus end screen determination process routine is finished. In the present embodiment, the title pattern is determined at the start of the big hit gaming state regardless of the number of winning balls (number of winning balls) in the big hit gaming state. However, at the end of the big hit gaming state, The title pattern may be determined according to the number of winning balls counted during the gaming state. Further, in this embodiment, the total number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state × the maximum number of winnings per round (“10” in this embodiment) × the number of winning balls per winning (in this embodiment) Based on “10”), the title pattern is determined and the content defined by the title pattern is displayed only at the end of the extra bonus. For example, the real game executed in the big hit gaming state during the extra bonus The title pattern may be determined based on the number of rounds × the maximum number of winnings per round × the number of winning balls per winning, and the contents defined in the title pattern may be displayed at the end of the extra bonus. Also, the title pattern may be determined by adding the number of winnings in the small hit gaming state or the number of winnings in rounds not corresponding to the actual round.

[Winning start effect processing]
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start effect process is a process for determining the effect contents at the start stage of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 133, in S600, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the start of the extra bonus. When the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that the bonus is started, the process proceeds to S601. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that it is not the start of the extra bonus, the process proceeds to S607.

  In S601, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the value of the payout prize ball counter. The payout prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of payout prize balls displayed on a blue meter display unit 900 (see FIG. 182 or the like) described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S602.

  In S602, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the value of the total prize ball counter. The total prize ball counter is as described above, and is a counter for counting the total number of prize balls displayed on a red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S603.

  In S603, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for displaying the title pattern corresponding to the number stored in the added bonus title determination process (S552 in FIG. 129). Based on the effect data related to the title pattern, the contents defined by the title pattern in the title determination lottery table are displayed at the start of the extra bonus. When the display is performed by the effect data related to the title pattern, the effect is also made by voice, a lamp, or the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S604.

  In step S604, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S605. This value corresponds to a time shorter than the opening waiting time (3996 ms), which is the sum of the time of the start interval of the extra bonus (996 ms) and the time until the start of the long opening in the extra bonus (102 ms + 2898 ms). Note that the value set in the valid period timer may correspond to a time longer than the release waiting time.

  In S605, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is made in the bonus bonus consecutive lottery process in S533 of FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a number corresponding to “winning” is stored in the information stored in the work RAM 73 as a result of the bonus bonus consecutive lottery process. If it is determined that the winning bonus continuous lottery process is won, the process proceeds to S606. If it is determined that the winning bonus continuous lottery process is not won, the winning start effect process routine is terminated.

  In step S606, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data corresponding to the special BGM. As a result, a special BGM different from normal is output at the start of the extra bonus. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends. Note that the timing at which the special BGM is output is not limited to the start of the extra bonus, and may be any timing as long as it is in the big hit gaming state.

  In step S <b> 607, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting hit start effect data corresponding to other hit start effects. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for executing effects until the first big winning opening is released in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In this process, different production data is set according to the types of production modes such as a super big bonus, a challenge bonus, and a V challenge. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

[Prize ball counter addition processing]
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter addition process executed by the sub CPU 71. This prize ball counter addition process is a process for adding the values of various prize ball counters, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 134, in S610, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. The remaining prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining prize balls for each round. The remaining number of winning balls is basically the maximum number of winning balls per round (“100” in the present embodiment), or the number of winning balls specified for each winning of the big winning opening (“10” in the present embodiment). ) Is the number obtained by subtracting. When it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the prize ball counter addition processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S611.

  In S611, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 10 from the value of the remaining prize ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S612.

  In S612, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 10 to the value of the cumulative payout ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S613.

  In step S613, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the bonus is being added based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the bonus is being added, the process proceeds to S614. If it is determined that the bonus is not being added, this prize ball counter addition processing routine is terminated.

  In S614, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 10 to the value of the payout prize ball counter. When this processing is finished, the prize ball counter addition processing routine is finished.

[V winning notification process]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning notification process is a process for notifying the V winning, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in S620, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting V winning notification data. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the V winning notification data for notifying that the game state shifts to the probable gaming state after the big hit gaming state is detected when the V winning is detected by passing the game ball through the specific area 38A. To do. As a result, an effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and predetermined sound generation and light emission are performed using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. . If this process ends, the process moves to S621. When the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “0CH”, that is, in the big hit gaming state of the collision V, a special effect image, for example, an image showing a ball of “V” is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Thereafter, an effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect image corresponding to the V winning is continuously displayed until the start of the hit end interval, but the display may be ended at a predetermined timing in the big hit game state. In addition, even if the big hit gaming state ends, it may be displayed continuously.

  In S621, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. The V winning notification flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the V winning notification has been performed. When the V winning notification is performed, “01H” is set as the value of the V winning notification flag, and when the V winning notification is not performed, “00H” is set as the value of the V winning notification flag. The If this process ends, the process moves to S622.

  In S622, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the warning notification timer. The warning notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for starting the warning notification for prompting the V prize. If this process ends, the process moves to S623.

  In S623, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the warning flag is “01H”. The warning flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not a V winning warning is being notified. The value of the warning flag is “01H” when the V-winning warning is being notified, and the value of the warning flag is “00H” when the V-winning warning is not being notified. If it is determined that the value of the warning flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S624. If it is determined that the value of the warning flag is not “01H”, the V winning notification process routine is terminated.

  In step S624, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “00H” to the value of the warning flag. Thereby, the warning notification of the V prize is ended. When this process is finished, the V winning notification process routine is finished.

[Round-to-round production processing]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents between the target rounds, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 136, in S630, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect process between the super big bonus rounds. The effect processing between the super big bonus rounds will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S631.

  In S631, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process between challenge bonus rounds. The effect process between challenge bonus rounds will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S632.

  In S632, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus round effect process. This extra bonus round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S633.

  In S633, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round process. This inter-round processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the inter-round effect process routine is finished.

[Direction processing between Super Big Bonus Rounds]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the effect processing between the super big bonus rounds executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect processing between rounds of the super big bonus is a process for determining the content of the effect between rounds in the super big bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in S640, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the super big bonus is being executed. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H” and it is determined that the super big bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S641. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “01H” and it is determined that the super big bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine between the super big bonus rounds is ended.

  In S641, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data related to the super big bonus according to the value of the round counter. When this process ends, the super big bonus round effect processing routine ends.

[Challenge bonus round production process]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an inter-challenge bonus round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus inter-round production process is a process for determining the production content between rounds in the challenge bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in S650, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a challenge bonus is being executed. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H” and it is determined that the challenge bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S651. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “02H” or “03H” and it is determined that the challenge bonus is not being executed, this challenge bonus inter-round effect processing routine is terminated.

  In step S651, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “2”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is during the interval between rounds after the end of the second round. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “2”, the process proceeds to S652. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “2”, the process proceeds to S653.

  In S652, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the valid period timer. Here, by setting the value of the validity period timer to “0”, the value of the challenge bonus type flag is determined. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round effect process routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 653, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a single game is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S654. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S655.

  In S654, the sub CPU 71 executes a single-game round effect process. This single game round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round effect process routine is terminated.

  In S655, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “02H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge is being executed three times. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “02H”, the process proceeds to S656. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S657.

  In S656, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing between three challenge rounds. The effect processing between the three challenge rounds will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round effect process routine is terminated.

  In S657, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise round effect process. The effect processing between surprise rounds will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the challenge bonus round effect process routine is terminated.

[Direction processing during one game round]
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a single-game round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This single-game round production process is a process for determining the production contents between rounds in a single game, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 139, in S660, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “9”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “9”, the process proceeds to S662. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “9”, the process proceeds to S661.

  In S <b> 661, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “10”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “10”, the process proceeds to S662. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “10”, the one-game round effect processing routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 662, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S664. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S663.

  In S <b> 663, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect control process after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing the effect after the button operation included in the content of the effect data, based on the effect data set for performing the effect during the round execution. This process is executed in response to the end of the 9Rth or 10thR before the button operation valid period becomes zero.

  In S664, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “11” or more. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “11” or more, the process proceeds to S665. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is less than “11”, the single-game round effect processing routine is terminated.

  In S665, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets data for executing an effect indicating transition to the ST mode or non-transition. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine for the single game round is ended. In the first game, between the rounds other than the 11th and 12th rounds, the performance is performed based on the performance data set in the performance process during the single-game round shown in FIG. Production may be performed based on the production data set in the production processing during the single-game round between the rounds of the rounds, even between rounds other than the 11R and 12R rounds. An effect may be executed based on the effect data set in the effect process.

[Direction processing between 3 challenge rounds]
FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the effect processing between three challenge rounds executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect process between the three challenge rounds is a process for determining the effect contents between the rounds in the three challenge, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 140, in S670, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the value of the round counter corresponds to any one of “4”, “6”, “8”, and “10”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “4”, “6”, “8”, and “10”, the process proceeds to S671. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of “4”, “6”, “8”, and “10”, the process proceeds to S673.

  In S <b> 671, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S672. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S673.

  In S672, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect control process after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing the effect after the button operation included in the content of the effect data, based on the effect data set for performing the effect during the round execution. This process is executed when the 4R, 6R, 8R, or 10R eyes have ended before the effective period of the button operation becomes zero. If this process ends, the process moves to S673.

  In S673, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, for example, effect data for displaying a dialogue is set between the start intervals until the next round of the 3R, 5R, and 7R rounds. In the three-time challenge, the inter-round effect is executed based on the effect data set in this process during the interval from the 3rd round to the 12th round of the next round. An inter-round effect may be executed based on the effect data set in the effect process during the challenge round. When this process is finished, the effect process routine between three challenge rounds is finished.

[Produce processing between surprise rounds]
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a surprise round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect processing between surprise rounds is a process for determining the contents of effects between rounds in the surprise, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 141, in S680, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S681. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S672.

  In S681, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect control process after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing the effect after the button operation included in the content of the effect data, based on the effect data set for performing the effect during the round execution. This process is executed in response to the end of the 3rd to 8Rth or 10th eyes before the effective period of the button operation becomes zero. If this process ends, the process moves to S682.

  In S682, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process ends, the surprise round inter-effect production process routine ends.

[Addition bonus round processing]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the extra bonus round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents between rounds in the extra bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 142, in S690, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an extra bonus is being executed. When the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that the bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S691. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that the additional bonus is not being executed, this additional bonus round round processing process is terminated.

  In step S <b> 691, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S694. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S692.

  In S692, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to a round in which the addition effect is executed. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to the round in which the addition effect is executed, the process proceeds to S693. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to the round in which the addition effect is executed, the process proceeds to S694.

  In step S <b> 693, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the validity period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S696.

  In S694, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S698. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S695.

  In S695, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the addition effect execution timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S696.

  In S696, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the extra number indicated by “character”, “combo”, “RUSH” based on the effect type defined in the scenario table to the total prize ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S697.

  In step S697, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting addition effect data for adding a numerical value corresponding to the number of payout prize balls displayed on a blue meter display unit 900 (see FIG. 182 or the like) described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets addition effect data for additionally displaying the number of paid-out prize balls, in addition to the effect such as the appearance of a character. If this process ends, the process moves to SS698. In this process, effect data for executing an effect related to the appearance of a character scheduled to be executed may be set.

  In S698, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S700. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S699.

  In S699, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the payout prize ball counter. That is, at the end of one round (actual round), even if the maximum number of winnings per round is not reached and the maximum number of winning balls per round is not reached, It is processed as a number obtained by adding. If this process ends, the process moves to S700.

  In S700, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus round effect process routine is finished.

[Round processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating inter-round processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This process between rounds is a process for determining the production contents between other rounds, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 143, in S710, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the inter-round processing routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S711.

  In S711, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the cumulative payout prize ball counter. That is, at the end of one round (actual round), even if the maximum number of winning balls per round is not reached and the maximum number of winning balls per round is not reached, It is processed as a number added number. If this process ends, the process moves to S712.

  In S712, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process is finished, the inter-round processing routine is finished.

[Direction processing during round]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the during-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents for each round, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 144, in S720, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S721.

  In S721, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the super big bonus round. The effect processing during the super big bonus round will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S722.

  In S722, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during the challenge bonus round. The effect processing during the challenge bonus round will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S723.

  In S723, the sub CPU 71 executes a bonus bonus round effect process. This extra bonus round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S724.

  In S724, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the V challenge. This V-challenge effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S725.

  In S725, the sub CPU 71 executes a round process. This round process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the round production process routine is finished.

[Direction processing during the Super Big Bonus Round]
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the super big bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect process during the super big bonus round is a process for determining the effect contents during the round in the super big bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 145, in S730, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the super big bonus is being executed. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H” and it is determined that the super big bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S731. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “01H” and it is determined that the super big bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine during the super big bonus round is ended.

  In S731, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “11”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the 11th round in which there is a possibility of V winning is being executed when the second big winning opening 37 is opened. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “11”, the process proceeds to S732. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “11”, the process proceeds to S734. In the present embodiment, since the V prize warning display is not performed at the first R, and only at the 11th R, it is determined whether or not it is the 11th R in the process of S731, but for example, the 11th R In addition, when the V prize warning display is performed not only at the 1Rth, it may be determined whether the value of the round counter is “1” or “11”.

  In S732, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “00H”. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is “00H”, the process proceeds to S733. When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “00H” but “01H” and the V winning notification has already been performed, the process proceeds to S734.

  In step S733, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as the predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the long opening of the specific area 38A (the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern) starts. If this process ends, the process moves to S734. In this embodiment, a predetermined value is set in the warning notification timer with the opening of the specific area 38A as a start reference, but the predetermined value with the opening of the second big prize opening 37 provided with the specific area 38A as a start reference. May be set. For example, the V prize warning notification may be performed 10 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening 37 starts.

  In S734, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus round effect process routine is finished.

[Direction processing during challenge bonus round]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the challenge bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect processing during the challenge bonus round is a process for determining the content of the effect during the round in the challenge bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 146, in S740, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a challenge bonus is being executed. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H” and it is determined that the challenge bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S741. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” or “03H” and it is determined that the challenge bonus is not being executed, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is terminated.

  In S741, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “1”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “1”, the process proceeds to S742. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “1”, the process proceeds to S745.

  In S <b> 742, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting challenge bonus selection effect data. That is, from the 1R to the 2R, in order to display a selection image for selecting the type of challenge bonus (single game, 3 times challenge, surprise), effect data corresponding to the selection image is set. The effect data from the start of the 1R to the end of the 2R is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S743.

  In S743, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” as an initial value to the value of the challenge bonus type flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S744.

  In S744, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30 s in the valid period timer. This value exceeds the duration of the 1R to 2R, such as the 1R opening time (0.102s) + the interval time between rounds after the 1R end (1.200s) + the 2R opening time (27.222s). Therefore, the value of the validity period timer does not become “0” from the start of the 1R to the end of the 2R. Therefore, selection by button operation is possible between the 1R and 2R. When this process is finished, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is finished. The predetermined value set in the validity period timer may be a value corresponding to a time shorter than the duration of the 1R to 2R. Alternatively, the type of challenge bonus may be automatically switched and displayed every time a predetermined time elapses, and the type of challenge bonus displayed in response to a button operation may be determined.

  In S745, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the type of challenge bonus is a single game. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S746. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S747.

  In S746, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the single-game round. The effect process during the single-game round will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S751.

  In S747, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “02H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus type is a three-time challenge. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “02H”, the process proceeds to S748. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S749.

  In S748, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during the third challenge round. The effect process during the third challenge round will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S751.

  In step S749, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the type of challenge bonus is surprise. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S750. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S751.

  In S750, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the surprise round. The effect processing during the surprise round will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S751.

  In S751, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H”. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H”, the process proceeds to S752. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H”, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is ended.

  In S752, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “11”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “11”, the process proceeds to S753. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “11”, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is terminated.

  In step S753, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. Also in this process, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as a predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the long opening of the specific area 38A (the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern) starts. When this process is finished, the effect processing routine during the challenge bonus round is finished.

[Direction processing during a single game round]
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the effect process during the single-game round executed by the sub CPU 71. This single-game round production process is a process for determining the production contents during a round in a single game, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 147, in S760, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “3”, the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “3”, the process proceeds to S761.

  In S761, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “7”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “7”, the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “7”, the process proceeds to S762.

  In S <b> 762, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “8”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “8”, the process proceeds to S763. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “8”, the process proceeds to S764.

  In step S763, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 4 s in the effective period timer in order to set the button effective period for displaying the Janken result. If this process ends, the process moves to S764.

  In step S764, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “10”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “10”, the process proceeds to S765. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “10”, the process proceeds to S768.

  In S765, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”. The challenge success / failure pattern flag has a challenge success / failure pattern No. as described above. It is an internal flag set according to 1 to 3. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the success is already notified, and if it is not “03H”, the success is not notified. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S766.

  In S766, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5 s in the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S770.

  In S767, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 varies the value set in the operation number counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, “10” is set for “02H”, and “300” is set for “01H”. In the case of failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that cannot be achieved within the validity period is set. Of course, the value set in the operation number counter may be uniform, or the value corresponding to the failure may be a value corresponding to a smaller number of times. Further, when the value of the operation number counter becomes “0” in the case corresponding to the failure, a result indicating the failure may be displayed before the value of the effective period timer becomes “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S770.

  In S768, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “11”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “11”, the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “11”, the process proceeds to S769.

  In S769, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “12”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “12”, the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “12”, the effect processing routine during the one-game round is ended.

  In S770, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data corresponding to the determination result stored in the single game effect determination process in FIG. For example, when the value of the round counter is “3”, effect data from the start of the 3R to immediately before the start of the 7R is set. When the value of the round counter is “7”, effect data from the start of the 7R to immediately before the start of the 8R is set. When the value of the round counter is “8”, effect data from the start of the 8R to immediately before the start of the 10R is set. When the value of the round counter is “10”, the effect data from the start of the 10R to immediately before the start of the 11R is set. When the value of the round counter is “11”, the effect data during execution of the 11th R is set. When the value of the round counter is “12”, the effect data during execution of the 12th R is set. When this process is finished, the effect process routine during the single-game round is finished.

[Direction processing during 3 challenge rounds]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the rendering process during the third challenge round executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect process during the third challenge round is a process for determining the contents of the effect during the round in the third challenge, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in S780, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “4”, “6”, and “8”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any one of “4”, “6”, and “8”, the process proceeds to S781. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of “4”, “6”, and “8”, the process proceeds to S783.

  In step S <b> 781, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether success notification has been performed. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not “success” has been notified before the execution of the round corresponding to the value of the round counter based on the determination result stored in the three-time challenge effect determination process of FIG. . If it is determined that the success notification has been performed, the process proceeds to S787. If it is determined that the success notification has not been performed, the process proceeds to S782.

  In S782, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5 s in the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S787.

  In step S <b> 783, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “10”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “10”, the process proceeds to S784. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “10”, the process proceeds to S787.

  In S784, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the success is already notified, and if it is not “03H”, the success is not notified. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S787. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S785.

  In step S785, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5 s in the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S786.

  In S786, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 varies the value set in the operation number counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, “10” is set for “02H”, and “300” is set for “01H”. In the case of failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that cannot be achieved within the validity period is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S787.

  In S787, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data corresponding to the determination result stored in the three-time challenge effect determination process of FIG. When this process is finished, the effect processing routine during the third challenge round is finished.

[Produce processing during the surprise round]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a surprise round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect process during the surprise round is a process for determining the contents of the effect during the round in the surprise, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 149, in S790, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “3” to “8”. That is, it is determined whether or not the round in which the effect pattern is determined in the surprise effect determination process of FIG. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “3” to “8”, the process proceeds to S791. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of “3” to “8”, the process proceeds to S793.

  In step S <b> 791, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a round with button operations is applicable. In this process, the sub CPU 71 stores the numbers (Nos. 2 to 4, 12 to 14) corresponding to the surprise patterns in which the valid period of the button operation is set as the determination result of the surprise effect determination process of FIG. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the round corresponds to the button operation, the process proceeds to S792. If it is determined that the round does not correspond to the button operation, the process proceeds to S797.

  In S792, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period preparation timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 4 s in the valid period preparation timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S797.

  In step S <b> 793, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the round counter is “10”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “10”, the process proceeds to S794. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “10”, the process proceeds to S797.

  In S794, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the success is already notified, and if it is not “03H”, the success is not notified. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S797. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S795.

  In step S795, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 5 s in the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S796.

  In step S796, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 varies the value set in the operation number counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, “10” is set for “02H”, and “300” is set for “01H”. In the case of failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that cannot be achieved within the validity period is set. Of course, the value set in the operation number counter may be uniform, or the value corresponding to the failure may be a value corresponding to a smaller number of times. Further, when the value of the operation number counter becomes “0” in the case corresponding to the failure, a result indicating the failure may be displayed before the value of the effective period timer becomes “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S797.

  In step S797, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data corresponding to the determination result stored in the surprise effect determination process of FIG. Specifically, as the effect data to be executed in the round corresponding to the value of the round counter, (1) effect data related to the surprise pattern determined in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 in FIG. 123, (2) FIG. There is effect data related to the icon display pattern determined in the icon determination process, and (3) effect data related to the character band pattern determined in the character band effect determination process of FIG. When this process is finished, the surprise round production process routine is finished.

[Additional bonus round production process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the bonus bonus round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents during the round in the extra bonus, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in S800, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”, the process proceeds to S801. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH”, this extra bonus round effect processing routine is terminated.

  In step S <b> 801, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for executing the effect during the round, based on the effect content determined in the additional bonus determination process of FIG. For example, when the value of the round counter is “1”, the effect data (data corresponding to the initial value pattern and the roulette pattern) corresponding to the determination result stored in the additional bonus initial process of FIG. 129 is set. When the value of the round counter corresponds to another value, if the determination result is stored in association with the actual round, the effect data corresponding to the stored determination result is set. Note that the value of the round counter referred to in this processing is a value corresponding to the actual round from “1” to “10”, but the value of the round counter is “12” to “16”. This corresponds to the 11th to 15th rounds of the round. For example, if the value of the round counter is “1” to “10”, an effect type, character, or the like corresponding to the 1st to 10th rounds of the real round defined in the added bonus scenario table of FIGS. However, when the value of the round counter is “11”, none of the bonus scenario table is referred to, and when the value of the round counter is “12” to “16”, Reference is made to the effect type, character, etc. corresponding to the 11th to 15th R of the specified substantial round. Further, when the determination result is not stored in association with the real round (when the effect type is G, M, or N), the scenario number flag if the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to the real round. The effect type to be executed is specified based on the value of the value, the added bonus scenario table, and the value of the round counter, and the effect data corresponding to the specified effect type is set. If the round counter value does not correspond to the actual round, the current round is the 11th round (the round counter value is “11”) and the next 12th round (the round counter value is “12”) is the real round. If there is, the performance data for continuously performing the performance executed in the previous round (the round whose counter value was “10”) is set, but if it is not a real round in other cases, that is, the current round When no substantial round is executed from the round, effect data for displaying the end display pattern is set based on the determination result stored in the bonus bonus end screen lottery process in S590 of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S802.

  In step S <b> 802, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a round with a combo RUSH is applicable. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the presentation type of the current round is “G” corresponding to “combo RUSH”. If it is determined that the round corresponds to the combo RUSH, the process proceeds to S803. If it is determined that the round does not fall under the combo RUSH, the process proceeds to S807.

  In step S803, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data corresponding to the operation frequency pattern corresponding to the determination result stored in the combo RUSH lottery processing in step S544 of FIG. For example, if the determination result stored in the combo RUSH lottery process corresponds to the operation number pattern No. 14, data corresponding to “5 → 3 → 5 → 5” is set as the operation number pattern. If this process ends, the process moves to S804.

  In step S804, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value based on the data set in step S803 in the addition counter. For example, when data corresponding to “5 → 3 → 5 → 5” of the operation number pattern No. 14 is set, the number of additions is 4, and “4” is set in the addition number counter. The numerical value to be added is +50 per “1” of the value set in the addition counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S805.

  In step S805, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value based on the data set in step S803 in the operation number counter. For example, when the data corresponding to “5 → 3 → 5 → 5” of the operation number pattern No. 14 is set, the required number of operations for the first operation is 5, so that the operation number counter is “5”. Is set. If this process ends, the process moves to S806.

  In step S806, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the validity period timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 8 seconds is set. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus round production process routine is finished.

  In step S <b> 807, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for determining whether or not a round with a button operation is applicable. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current round is an effect other than “combo RUSH” and an effect that requires button operation (roulette effect, character appearance effect, cow character revival effect). Determine whether. If it is determined that the round corresponds to the button operation, the process proceeds to S808. When it is determined that the round does not correspond to the button operation, the process proceeds to S809.

  In step S808, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period preparation timer. For example, a value corresponding to 3s is set for the roulette effect, a value corresponding to 5s is set for the character appearance effect, and a value corresponding to 6s is set for the bull character revival effect. A value corresponding to a time other than these may be set. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus round production process routine is finished.

  In step S809, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it corresponds to a round in which the effect corresponding to the effect type M, that is, the reverse effect at the end of the extra bonus is executed. If it is determined that the event corresponds to a round in which an effect corresponding to the effect type M is executed, the process proceeds to S810. If it is determined that it does not correspond to the round in which the effect corresponding to the effect type M is executed, the additional bonus round effect process routine is terminated.

  In S810, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the addition effect execution timer. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus round production process routine is finished. For example, a value corresponding to 7 s is set in the addition effect execution timer. Thereby, after the end display pattern (6.814s) is displayed, an SP character can be made to appear in a pseudo manner, and the additional number can be added when the SP character appears.

[Direction processing during V-challenge]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during V-challenge executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect process during the V challenge is a process for determining the contents of the effect in the V challenge, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As illustrated in FIG. 151, in S820, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “0CH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a collision V. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “0CH”, the process proceeds to S821. When it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “0CH”, this V-challenge effect processing routine is terminated.

  In S821, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for executing the effect in the collision V according to the number of rounds. With this effect data, effects from the start of the 1R to the end of the 11R in the collision V are executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S822.

  In S822, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is “1”, that is, whether or not it corresponds to the open round of the second big prize opening 37. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “1”, the process proceeds to S823. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “1”, this V-challenge effect processing routine is terminated.

  In step S823, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as the predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the long opening of the specific area 38A (the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern) starts. When this process is finished, the effect processing routine during the V challenge is finished. In this process as well, a predetermined value is set in the warning notification timer based on the opening of the specific area 38A as a start reference, but the predetermined value is set based on the opening of the second big prize opening 37 provided with the specific area 38A. May be set. For example, the V prize warning notification may be performed 10 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening 37 starts.

  In S824, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “0DH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “0DH”, the process proceeds to S825. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “0DH”, this extra V-challenge effect processing routine is terminated.

  In S825, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during small hits. The effect during the small hit will be described later. When this process is finished, the effect processing routine during the V challenge is finished.

[In-round processing]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the in-round processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round process is a process for determining the production contents during the other rounds, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 152, in S830, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to a substantial round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 specifies the type of winning based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag, and determines whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to a substantial round. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to the actual round, the process proceeds to S831. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not a value corresponding to the actual round, the in-round processing routine is terminated. Note that the round in which the opening patterns A, B, D, and E are executed is determined as a substantial round.

  In S831, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “100” as the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process is finished, the in-round process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in S840, the sub CPU 71 executes a super big bonus end effect process. The super big bonus end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S841.

  In S841, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge bonus end effect process. This challenge bonus end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S842.

  In S842, the sub CPU 71 executes an extra bonus end effect process. This additional bonus end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S843.

  In S843, the sub CPU 71 executes a V challenge end effect process. This V challenge end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S844.

  In S844, the sub CPU 71 executes other hit end processing. This winning end process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Super big bonus end effect processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the super big bonus end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This super big bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the super big bonus hit end interval, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 154, in S850, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a super big bonus. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “01H” and it is determined that it is a super big bonus, the process proceeds to S851. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “01H” and it is determined that it is not a super big bonus, this super big bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S851, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the super big bonus. When this process ends, the super big bonus end effect processing routine ends.

[Challenge bonus end effect processing]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing challenge bonus end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the challenge bonus hit end interval, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in S860, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a challenge bonus. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H” and it is determined that it is a challenge bonus, the process proceeds to S861. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” or “03H” and it is determined that the winning bonus is not a challenge bonus, the challenge bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S861, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the challenge bonus according to the value of the challenge bonus type flag. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets different effect data according to the value of the challenge bonus type flag in order to execute an end effect having different contents according to the type of challenge bonus executed. It should be noted that regardless of the value of the challenge bonus type flag, the end effect may have the same content, or the end content may have the same content only for the two challenge bonus types. If this process ends, the process moves to S862.

  In S862, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the type of challenge bonus is surprise. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S863. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S864.

  In S863, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” as the initial value of the success notification round flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S864.

  In S864, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” as the initial value of the challenge bonus type flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S865.

  In S865, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” as an initial value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. When this process is ended, the challenge bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

[Add bonus bonus effect processing]
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the extra bonus end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This extra bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the extra bonus hit end interval, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 156, in S870, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that the bonus is an additional bonus, the process proceeds to S871. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that the bonus is not an additional bonus, the additional bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S871, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the extra bonus. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for displaying the title pattern based on the determination result stored in the bonus title determination processing in S591 of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S872.

  In step S872, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S873. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S874.

  In S873, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the value of the payout prize ball counter. In other words, in the final real round of the extra bonus, even if the maximum number of winnings per round is not reached and the maximum number of winning prizes per round is not reached, the number of payout prizes is added to the number of remaining winning balls Is processed as a number. If this process ends, the process moves to S874.

  In S874, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” as the initial value of the scenario number flag. When this process is finished, the bonus bonus end effect process routine is finished.

[V challenge end effect processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the V challenge end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V challenge end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval of the V challenge, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in S880, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “0CH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a collision V. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “0CH”, the process proceeds to S881. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “0CH”, the V challenge end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S881, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S882. When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H” but “00H” and the V winning notification is not performed, the V challenge end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S882, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for informing the continuation of the ST mode. When this process ends, the V challenge end effect process routine ends.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in other hit end intervals, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in S890, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S891.

  In S891, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S892.

  In S892, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S895. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S893.

  In S893, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the cumulative payout prize ball counter. That is, when the last round (actual round) of the winning gaming state is finished, even if the maximum number of winning balls per round is not reached and the maximum number of winning balls per round is not reached, The number is processed as a number obtained by adding the number of remaining prize balls. If this process ends, the process moves to S894.

  In S894, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the remaining prize ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S895.

  In S895, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S896. When it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H” but “00H” and the V winning notification is not performed, the winning end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S896, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Direction mode change processing]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 159, in S900, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of winning game ended based on the received gaming state command is a small hit. The gaming state command may include information on the completed winning gaming state, and the sub CPU 71 can determine the type of winning game that has ended based on the information included in the gaming state command. When it is determined that the type of the winning game that has ended is a small hit, the effect mode change processing routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of the winning game is not a small hit, the process proceeds to S901.

  In S901, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a probability change gaming state and a short-time gaming state. If it is determined that the gaming state command is a command indicating a probability-changing gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the process proceeds to S902. If it is determined that the gaming state command is not a command indicating a probability-changing gaming state or a short-time gaming state, the process proceeds to S903.

  In step S <b> 902, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “04H” as the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the ST mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

  In S903, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a probability change gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. If it is determined that the game state command is a command indicating a probability change game state and a non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to S904. If it is determined that the game state command is not a command indicating the probability variation gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, that is, the command indicating the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the effect mode change processing routine is ended.

  In S904, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the remaining number of short times included in the game state command as information (hereinafter referred to as “remaining short number of times”) is four. If it is determined that the remaining short count is 4, the process proceeds to S905. If it is determined that the remaining short time is not four, the process proceeds to S906.

  In step S <b> 905, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “02H” as the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the short mode of the time reduction mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

  In step S <b> 906, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “03H” as the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the long mode of the time reduction mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

[Time-saving mode end processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a time-saving mode end process executed by the sub CPU 71. This time saving mode end process is a process for ending the time saving mode as the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in S910, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the special mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S911.

  In step S911, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the special mode counter. As a result, the special mode is executed up to 10 games. If this process ends, the process moves to S912.

  In step S <b> 912, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the cumulative payout ball counter. That is, in this process, the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter is cleared because the so-called “renso” ends. This “renso” refers to the transition from the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-short-time state to the big-hit gaming state, and then to the big-hit gaming state again before the transition to the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time-short state state again. Means to migrate. Note that the value of the cumulative payout ball counter may not be cleared in response to a button operation or the like. Further, the value of the cumulative payout ball counter is stored until the special mode ends, and “0” is set to the value of the cumulative payout ball counter when the special mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. You may do it. When this process is terminated, the time-saving mode termination process routine is terminated.

[ST mode end processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing ST mode end processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This ST mode end process is a process for ending the ST mode as the effect mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 161, in S920, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the production mode becomes the special mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S921.

  In S921, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the special mode counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S922.

  In S922, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the cumulative payout ball counter. The accumulated payout ball counter value is stored until the special mode ends, and when the special mode ends and the normal mode is entered, the accumulated payout ball counter value is set to “0”. You may do it. When this process ends, the ST mode end process routine ends.

[Discharge error notification processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a discharge error notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This discharge error notification process is a process for notifying a discharge error, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 162, in S930, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge error notification timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Other seconds may be used, or a discharge error may be notified until the power is turned off without applying the discharge error notification timer.

  In S931, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S932. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the discharge error notification process is terminated.

  In S932, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the discharge error notification flag. As a result, a discharge error is notified. When this process ends, the discharge error notification process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 184, the contents of effects in each effect mode will be described mainly using screen display examples.

[Example of normal screen display]
FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal screen display. The normal time here means the execution time of the production mode such as the normal mode, the special mode, the time reduction mode, or the ST mode. As shown in the figure, on the screen of the display area 4A in the normal state, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, first reserved number information 701 corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol Second reserved number information 702 corresponding to the symbol start memory is displayed.

  The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are, for example, arranged in three columns, and the numerical symbols “1” to “7” are displayed in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with a special symbol variation display and a stop display. When the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, basically, the decorative symbols 700 are in the stop display mode in a state where all of them are arranged in the same numeric symbol from the variable display mode. However, when the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift to the big hit game state or the small hit game state that becomes the collision V, they become a stop display mode in the order of the numerical symbols such as “135”. The stop display mode of the decorative pattern 700 other than these is lost.

  The first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 are displayed by the reserved marks corresponding to the reserved numbers corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Up to four upper limit marks indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are additionally displayed according to the winning of the game balls to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, respectively. The hold mark indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 is displayed when the decorative symbol starts to be displayed together with the special symbol based on the start memory of the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol, respectively. It disappears from the right end and disappears. When both of the hold marks of the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are displayed, the start memory of the second special symbol has priority over the start memory of the first special symbol. 2 The hold mark of the hold number information 702 is erased in preference to the hold mark of the first hold number information 701.

  Although not particularly illustrated, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various effect modes according to the effect contents. Of course, the same display image, background image, etc. may be displayed even in different rendering modes.

[Example of screen display in time reduction mode]
FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example in the time reduction mode. First, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state, when shifting to the short mode of the short time mode, on the screen of the display area 4A, the stop when changing to the big hit gaming state It is assumed that a plurality of decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed in a display mode, and a plurality of hold marks indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are displayed.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the fluctuating display of the plurality of decorative symbols 700 is started, and accordingly, the reserved mark of the second reserved number information 702 is changed to the first reserved number information. It is erased in preference to the 701 hold mark.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the plurality of decorative symbols 700 being displayed in a variable manner are displaced to the corners, and the six symbol images 700A to 700F are left at the center. Scrolling is displayed so as to move in the direction (FIG. 164 (C) does not show one symbol image 700F (see FIG. 164 (D), etc.)).

  The symbol image 700A is displayed as “long” as an image for informing the transition from the short mode to the long mode. The symbol image 700 </ b> B is displayed as “chance” as an image suggesting that the “long” symbol image 700 </ b> A may be stopped during the next variation display of the decorative design 700. The symbol image 700 </ b> C is displayed as “Development” as an image indicating that the symbol image 700 </ b> C develops to an effect indicating whether or not to shift to the winning gaming state. The symbol image 700D is displayed as “sorry” as an image indicating that the mode does not shift to the long mode even if the short mode is finished four times. The symbol image 700E is displayed as “big hit” on condition that the decorative symbol 700 that is currently variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a big win mode. The symbol image 700F is displayed as a blank image on the condition that the decorative symbol 700 that is currently variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a lost manner (see FIG. 164 (D) and the like).

  In these symbol images 700 </ b> A to 700 </ b> F, when the scroll display is stopped, the symbol image located at the left end indicates the transition of the game result or the effect mode. In the present embodiment, when the scroll display of the symbol images 700A to 700F is stopped, a plurality of decorative symbols 700 are then stopped and displayed. Note that the scroll display of the symbol image may be stopped after the stop display of the decorative design. Such scroll display and stop display of the symbol images 700 </ b> A to 700 </ b> F are performed only in the short mode, that is, after the time-short mode is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, until the number of changes of the decorative symbol 700 reaches four times. May be performed in conjunction with the display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), the symbol image 700C may be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end on the screen of the display area 4A. In this case, the player can enhance his expectation that an effect indicating whether or not to shift to the winning gaming state is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), the symbol image 700A may be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end on the screen of the display area 4A. Such a stop display state of the symbol image 700 </ b> A can occur up to four times the number of times the special symbol (decorated symbol) fluctuates after the end of the big hit gaming state. Similarly, the other symbol images 700B to 700F can be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end up to four times of variation. In this embodiment, regardless of whether the effect mode flag is “02H” or “03H”, the screen always shifts to the short mode. Especially when the effect mode flag is “03H”, the number of times the decorative symbol 700 changes The “long” symbol image 700A is stopped and displayed at the leftmost end of the display area 4A until four times (four games) are reached. The timing at which the “long” symbol image 700A is stopped and displayed may be determined by lottery, for example. It should be noted that when the production mode flag is “02H”, the mode is always shifted to the short mode, and when the production mode flag is “03H”, the mode may be shifted to the long mode without shifting to the short mode on the screen. In addition, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol that can be shifted to the probable gaming state but the V winning is not achieved, the mode may be shifted to the long mode without shifting to the short mode. Further, even when the time reduction mode ends without shifting to the long mode, the “long” symbol image may be stopped and displayed at the left end. Even in the case of shifting to the long mode, the symbol image of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed at the left end. Such an effect contrary to the actual flow of the short time mode is preferably generated under the condition that the decorative symbol 700 which is currently variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a big win mode.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (F), for example, when the mode is shifted to the long mode after digesting four times as the number of time reductions, the effect display using the symbol images 700A to 700F is not performed on the screen of the display area 4A. The decorative design 700 is displayed at the original central portion. At this time, the background image is switched from the content corresponding to the short mode to the content corresponding to the long mode.

  In addition, it is good also as a specification which can transfer to either a short mode or a long mode immediately after completion | finish of a big hit game state. In such a specification, when the number of time reductions ends with 4 times, it is preferable to shift from the long mode to the short mode within 4 special symbol fluctuations.

[Examples of screen display for Challenge Bonus 1R-2R]
FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example in the first to second Rs of the challenge bonus. As shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (C), in the 1R to 2R of the challenge bonus, on the screen of the display area 4A, the type of challenge bonus is displayed to the player together with a plurality of icons 800 indicating the number of rounds. A selection effect image for selection is displayed. A plurality of icons 800 corresponding to the 1st to 10th eyes are displayed, and those corresponding to the 11th to 12th eyes are not displayed. The icon 800 corresponding to the current round is highlighted by blinking or color development until the next round starts, and when the next round starts, the one corresponding to the previous round is erased and hidden. . In FIG. 165, for convenience, the erased icon 800 is indicated by a broken line, and the highlighted icon 800 is indicated by a bold line.

  The selected effect image includes title images 810A to 810C indicating “one-game match”, “three-time challenge”, and “surprise” as types of challenge bonuses, and character images indicating characters associated with each type of challenge bonus 811A to 811C and message images 812A to 812C indicating the success conditions in the production are included. The selected effect image is switched according to the operation of the effect button.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), as the first selection effect image, a title image 810A indicating “one game”, a character image 811A indicating “Don-chan”, “win the Janken confrontation! Win! Is displayed, a message image 812A indicating the success condition of “one-sided game” such as “Success !!!!” is displayed. When the effect button is operated, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), as the next selected effect image, a title image 810B indicating “3 times challenge”, a character image 811B indicating “cow character”, and “playing the opponent” are displayed. A message image 812B indicating the success condition of the “three-time challenge” such as “Skip it! Play it successfully!” Is displayed. Further, when the effect button is operated, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), as a next selected effect image, a title image 810C indicating “surprise”, a character image 811C indicating “凛 花”, “don't miss the surprise chance” A message image 812C indicating a “surprise” success condition, such as “Success is achieved when an accessory is completed!” Is displayed. After the display of these selected effect images, when the second period ends and the effective period of the button operation becomes 0, the type of challenge bonus corresponding to the currently displayed selected effect image is determined.

[Example of screen display for single game]
FIGS. 166 to 171 are diagrams showing screen display examples of a single game. In a single game, production is performed according to the flow described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the icon 800 corresponding to the 3R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the 3R eye. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a character image 811A and a character image 811D indicating an opponent are displayed, and a moving image 820A showing a state in which a draw (Aiko) continues three times is displayed. This moving image 820 is based on the soap pattern determined using the soap pattern lottery table shown in FIGS.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the icon 800 corresponding to the 4R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A when the 4R eye is started. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a video 820B is shown that further shows that the draw continues in the Janken, and that the number of continuous draws is greatly indicated as an Aiko count. This moving image 820B is based on the single game combination pattern determined using the single game combination lottery table in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, for example, when the 6th eye is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 6R eye is highlighted. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820C that greatly shows the last count of the Aiko count and the character image 811A is displayed. This moving image 820C is based on the single game combination pattern determined using the single game combination lottery table in FIG. Such a series of moving images 820A, 820B, and 820C are displayed in the 3rd to 6th eyes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, when the 7th eye is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 7th eye is highlighted. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820D showing a large line starting with the last Janken is displayed. This moving image 820D is based on the single game combination pattern determined using the single game combination lottery table of FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), the icon 800 corresponding to the 8R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A when the 8R eye is started. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820E indicating a message “Press!” Is displayed together with an effect button and a meter indicating a valid period. This moving image 820E is based on the single game combination pattern determined using the single game combination lottery table of FIG. After the moving image 820E is displayed, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the effective period, or when the effective period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the screen of the display area 4A is as follows. Correct images are displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the character images 811A and 811D are displayed again, and a moving image 820F showing a state where the player has won the game is displayed. This moving image 820F is based on the single-game combination pattern determined using the single-game combination lottery table in FIG. 18, and the single-game combination pattern includes information “winning the result”. It is based on.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (G), the icon 800 corresponding to the 9R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A when the 9R eye is started. A message image 820G such as “ST mode CHANCE” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A together with the character image 811A. Thereby, it is notified that a round game that facilitates V winning in the specific area 38A is executed. Such a message image 820G is continuously displayed even at the 10th eye.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (H), when the 11th eye is started, a message image 820G such as “ST mode CHANCE” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A and a prize is awarded to the second big prize opening 37. The notification image 820H for notifying that the round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is being executed is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (I), if a state in which no V prize is detected in the specific area 38A continues even after a predetermined time (approximately 13 s) has elapsed after the start of the 11th round, the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. Displays a warning image 820I indicating a warning message such as “Aim for V winning!” To encourage V winning in the specific area 38A.

  As shown in FIG. 169 (J), when the V winning in the specific area 38A is actually detected in the 11th eye, “V” indicating that the V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A message image 820J such as “winning!” Is displayed. That is, it is notified that the transition to the probability variation gaming state has been confirmed. The message image 820J of “V winning!” Indicating that the transition to the probability changing gaming state is confirmed is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state is finished.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 170 (F ′), on the screen of the display area 4A, the character images 811A and 811D are re-displayed at the 8th eye, and a moving image 820F ′ showing a state where the player has lost the game is displayed. There is also a case. The moving image 820F ′ in this case is based on the single-game combination pattern determined using the single-game combination lottery table in FIG. 18, and information indicating “result loss” is included in the single-game combination pattern. It is based on what is included. Such a moving image 820F 'is also displayed in the 9th to 10th eyes.

  In such a case, next, as shown in FIG. 170 (G ′), the icon 800 corresponding to the 10th R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and the “continuous strike” is displayed together with the effect button and the meter indicating the effective period. The last challenge video 820G ′ showing the message “!” Is displayed. This last challenge video 820G 'is a challenge success / failure pattern No. determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table of FIG. 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) or challenge success / failure pattern no. 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (H ′), the screen of the display area 4A includes a message “ST mode CHANCE repeated!” Together with a production button and a meter indicating the effective period, and further includes character images 811A and 811D. Is gradually disappeared by closing the door, and the last challenge video 820H ′ is displayed indicating that the result of Janken is unknown. This last challenge video 820H 'is also a challenge success / failure pattern No. determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table of FIG. 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) or challenge success / failure pattern no. 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success). After such a moving image 820H ′ is displayed, the pressing operation button 9A is repeatedly hit within the effective period to reach the predetermined number of operations, or the pressing operation button 9A is operated without reaching the predetermined number of operations. When the valid period elapses, the following image is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (I ′), the character images 811A and 811D are displayed again on the screen of the display area 4A, and for example, a moving image 820I ′ showing a state where the player has lost the game is displayed. Is done. This moving image 820I 'is based on the single game combination pattern determined using the single game combination lottery table in FIG. Corresponding to 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure), this single-game combination pattern includes information “losing result”. Although not particularly illustrated, the challenge success / failure pattern No. is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A moving image based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) may be displayed. In this case, for example, the door is fully closed, and an effect is made such that the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B appear in front of the display area 4A (see FIG. 176F). ).

  After the moving image 820I 'is displayed, an image 820J' such as "Last challenge failed!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 171 (J '). Thereby, it is notified that a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed. Such an image 820J 'of "Last Challenge Failure!" Is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state is completed. Although not shown in particular, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When a moving image based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) is displayed, an image such as “Last Challenge Success!” May be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A (see FIG. 174 (H)). Thereby, it is notified that a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed.

[Example of screen display of 3 times challenge]
FIGS. 172 to 174 are diagrams showing a screen display example of a three-time challenge. In the 3rd challenge, production will be performed according to the flow described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 172 (A), an icon 800 corresponding to the 3R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the 3R eye. Then, at the interval between rounds after the end of the third round, a message image 830A such as “READY Camo!” Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Thereby, it is foretold that an effect requesting some operation is performed in the next 4R.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the icon 800 corresponding to the 5R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the 5R eye. Then, at the interval between rounds after the end of the 5th round, a message image 830B such as “READY is going to go!” Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Thereby, it is foretold that an effect requesting some operation is performed in the next 6R.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), an icon 800 corresponding to the 7R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A when the 7R eye is started. Then, at the interval between rounds after the end of the 7th round, a message image 830C such as “Ready last decision!” Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is predicted that an effect requesting some operation will be performed in the next 8R. In such a notice effect, for example, by making it possible to display the content and order of characters displayed together with “READY” in different patterns, it is suggested that a round in which V winning in a specific area is easy is executed. May be.

  Thereafter, for example, in the case of 4R, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), the icon 800 corresponding to the 4R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and “Don-chan” and “Cow Character” are opposed to each other. A moving image 830D indicating a message “Press!” Is displayed together with a production button and a meter indicating the validity period. After the moving image 830D is displayed, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the effective period, or when the effective period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the screen of the display area 4A is as follows. Correct images are displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, a video 830E showing a state where “Don-chan” is pushed by the “cow character” and an effect result such as “Success!” Is shown. May be displayed. Such a moving image 820E is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table in FIG. 21, and the information “success” is included in the three-time challenge pattern. Is based. This “success!” Video 830E may be displayed at the 6th or 8th R based on the determined three-time challenge pattern. After such a “success!” Video 830E is displayed, a video similar to that shown in FIGS. 168 (G) and 169 (H) to (J) is displayed. When the “success!” Video 830E is displayed, an effect of causing the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B to appear may be performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173 (E ′), on the screen of the display area 4A, “Don-chan” shows a state where the “cow character” is avoided, and a moving image 830E showing an effect result such as “failure!”. 'May be displayed. Such a moving image 820E ′ is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table in FIG. 21, and the three-time challenge pattern includes information “failure”. It is based on. This “failure!” Moving image 830E ′ may be displayed at the 6th or 8th R based on the determined three-time challenge pattern.

  For example, when a video 830E ′ of “failure!” Is displayed on the 8th R, as shown in FIG. 174 (F ′), “Don-chan” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the next 9R. While showing the state where the “cow character” is turned upside down in a state where the “cow character” is avoided, a moving image 830F ′ showing the effect result such as “failure!” Is displayed. Such a moving image 830F ′ is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table of FIG. 21, and all the information “failure-failure-failure” is included in the three-time challenge pattern. It is based on what is included.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (G ′), the screen of the display area 4A includes a message “ST mode CHANCE consecutive hits!” Together with a production button and a meter indicating the effective period. The last challenge video 830G ′ indicating that the result of the third challenge is not known is displayed. This last challenge video 830G 'is a challenge success / failure pattern No. determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table of FIG. 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) or challenge success / failure pattern no. 2 (Challenge failure → Last chance success). After such a moving image 830G ′ is displayed, the pressing operation button 9A is repeatedly hit within the effective period to reach the predetermined number of operations, or the pressing operation button 9A is not operated at all without reaching the predetermined number of operations. If the validity period elapses, the challenge success / failure pattern no. When 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 174 (H ′), an image 830 </ b> H ′ of “Last Challenge Success!” Is displayed. In this case, although not particularly illustrated, before the image 830H ′ of “Last Challenge Success!” Is displayed, for example, the door is fully closed, and the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower part are in front of the display area 4A. An effect such that the side movable effect member 42B appears is performed. On the other hand, although not shown in particular, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 is determined, an image of “Last Challenge Failed!” Is displayed in the same manner as the screen example shown in FIG. 171 (J ′) described above.

[Example of surprise screen display]
175 to 177 are diagrams showing examples of surprise screen display. In the surprise, the production is performed according to the flow described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 175 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, icons 800 corresponding to the 1st to 10th eyes are displayed as star marks. In the 2R eye, the icon 800 corresponding to the 2R eye is highlighted. Further, a title image 810C indicating “surprise” and a character image 811C are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), when the 3rd eye is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 3R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, while the 3rd to 8R eyes. The icon 800 corresponding to is switched to a circular mark and displayed. At this time, all the icons 800 corresponding to the 3rd to 8R eyes are displayed as white icons. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, a surprise dedicated animation 840A is displayed, and a character band image 840B indicating a surprise dedicated message is displayed. This character band image 840B is based on the character band pattern determined using the surprise character band lottery tables of FIGS.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), when the 4R eye is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 4R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, while the 5R eye is corresponded. The icon 800 may be displayed as a green icon, and the icon 800 corresponding to the 6R eye may be displayed as a blue icon. Such a change in the display color of the icon 800 is based on the icon pattern determined using the icon pattern lottery table in FIG. 24 and the icon change lottery table in FIGS. It can also occur at the start of the 5R-8R. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect animation 840A and a character band image 840B different from the 3R-th are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), when the 5R eye is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 5R eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and the icon corresponding to the 5R eye is displayed. 800 may be displayed as a red icon. In other words, in the 4th to 8th eyes, the display color of the icon 800 changes so as to suggest that a round (11R) in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed according to the color. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect animation 840A and a character band image 840B different from the 3R-th are displayed. The change in the message shown in the character band image 840B also suggests that a round (11R) in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), in the 5Rth, a moving image 840C showing a meter indicating an effect button and an effective period is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Such a moving image 840C is based on the surprise pattern determined using the surprise pattern lottery table of FIG.

  Then, after the video 840C is displayed, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the effective period, or when the effective period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, as shown in FIG. An upper movable effect member 42A and a lower movable effect member 42B appear in front of the 4A screen. That is, it is notified that a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed by the appearance of such an effect member.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (G), a message image 840D such as “ST mode CHANCE” is displayed together with the character image 811C on the screen of the display area 4A. Thereby, it is notified that the round (the 11th R) in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is executed. Such a message image 840D is continuously displayed up to the 10th eye. In addition, even in the 3rd to 8R of the surprise, there may be cases where the notification that the round with easy V winning is executed is not performed. In such a case, the last challenge video as described above is displayed. Based on the challenge success / failure pattern, an image of “Last Challenge Success!” Or “Last Challenge Failure!” May be displayed (see FIGS. 171 (J ′) and 174 (H ′)). In this embodiment, the display color of the icon may change even after notifying that a round in which V winning is easy is performed, but the display color may not be changed after the notification. In addition, the character band is not displayed after such notification, but may be displayed.

[V Challenge screen display example]
FIGS. 178 to 180 are diagrams illustrating screen display examples of the V challenge. In the V challenge, production is performed according to the flow described below.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (A), for example, when a V-challenge is started by shifting from the ST mode, a lottery device for lucky pull and conditions for continuing the ST mode by effect display are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A moving image 850A is displayed. In addition, unless it is the case where it transfers to V challenge from ST mode, you may make it show the conditions of rushing into ST mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 850B showing how the lottery device starts rotating is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, after the opening of the second big prize opening 37 due to the small hit, or after the second big prize opening 37 due to the collision V, After the first short opening is started, a moving image 850C that prompts the player to aim the second big prize opening 37 with a right hand is displayed. At this time, in the case of a collision V, the video 350C continues to be displayed until a V winning in the specific area 38A is detected, but the V winning cannot be detected for a predetermined time after the second big winning opening 37 is opened. In such a case, a warning image indicating a warning message stating that “you will not enter the ST mode unless you win early in the lower major prize opening!” Is displayed in order to encourage V winning in the specific area 38A. When a V prize is detected in the collision V, the display as shown in FIGS. 179 (D) and 179 (E) is performed. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the display as shown in FIG. 180 (D ′) and FIG. 180 (E ′) is performed at the timing after the opening of the second big winning opening 37 is completed. In addition, as a warning that the V prize is urged in the collision V, for example, a warning notification may be performed only by voice. Further, the warning notification pattern is not limited to the above-described pattern, and may be a pattern that combines, for example, the output of sound and the operation of the movable effect member, and further, the opening time of the second big prize opening elapses. Accordingly, a means for notifying a warning may be added.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), when a V prize is detected in the collision V, a moving image 850D showing a state in which a V-marked ball has come out from the lottery device is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), an image 850E indicating “ST mode continued!” Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is notified that the ST mode continues through the collision V. After the display of such an image 850E, the screen of the display area 4A returns to the screen for effect display in the ST mode.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (D ′), for example, in the case of a small hit, a moving image 850D ′ is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A indicating that a ball without a V mark has come out from the lottery device. The Note that such a moving image 850D 'is also displayed when all round games have ended without a V winning in the specific area 38A being detected in the collision V.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (E ′), the screen of the display area 4 </ b> A returns to the screen for effect display in the ST mode. In other words, the display returns to the display screen in the gaming state before the transition to the winning gaming state. If no V prize is detected in the collision V, the mode is always shifted to the short time mode (short mode) regardless of the gaming state before the transition to the collision V, and the effect screen corresponding to the time reduction mode is displayed. . In addition, if the gaming state when winning a small hit is the final game in the short-time mode (final game in the short-time gaming state) or the final game in the ST mode (final game in the probability variation gaming state) After the end of, the special mode (non-probability game state and non-time-short game state) is shifted to an effect screen corresponding to the special mode. In other words, when shifting from the non-probability changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state of the collision V, when the transition is made from the normal mode or the special mode to the V challenge, for example, specified at the first R of the collision V When the V winning in the area 38A is detected, the mode shifts to the ST mode after the big hit gaming state of the hit V, but when the V winning in the specific area 38A is not detected at the first R of the hit V, the time reduction mode is set. Will be migrated. On the other hand, in the case of the small hit gaming state, in principle, regardless of the presence or absence of the V prize, after the end of the small hit gaming state, it returns to the effect mode at the time of winning the small hit.

[Additional bonus performance pattern]
FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an effect pattern of an extra bonus. In the extra bonus, various effects are performed based on the effect types A to N indicating the effect patterns determined using the add-on bonus scenario tables of FIGS. As shown in FIG. 181, in the effect type A, an effect video “Waiting for character revival” indicating a state where a cow character may appear in a partially visible state is displayed. In the effect type B, an effect video of “determine initial value” indicating that the initial value of the additional number is determined using the roulette is displayed. In the effect type C, an effect video of “character appearance failure” indicating that an opponent is not appearing although an effect by a tug of war is performed is displayed. In the effect type D, an effect video “Character Appearance Success-No Combo” indicating that an opponent character appears but no other object appears is displayed. In the effect type E, while the opponent's character appears, an effect video of “character appearance successful—with combo” indicating that an object indicating the sun appears, for example, is displayed. In the production type F, while the opponent character appears, for example, an object indicating the sun appears, and an effect video of “Character Appearance Success-Combo Existence-RUSH rush” including an image that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the production button is displayed. The In the effect type G, an effect video of “combo RUSH” that only prompts the effect button to be struck is displayed. In the effect type H, an effect video of “SP character appearance” indicating the appearance of the SP character is displayed. In the effect type I, an effect animation “character revival” indicating that the cow character has appeared again is displayed. In the effect type J, before the effect moving image based on the effect type D is displayed, the effect movie “Rebirth Flower Revival-No Combo” indicating the appearance of the character “Reika” is displayed. In the effect type K, before the effect moving image based on the effect type E is displayed, the effect movie “rebirth revival-with combo” indicating the appearance of the character “Rika” is displayed. In the effect type L, before the effect video based on the effect type F is displayed, an effect video “Rebirth of the Reika-Combo with-RUSH” showing the appearance of the character “Rika” is displayed. . Such production types J to L are the same in the production video itself based on each, but the production videos after the display are based on the production types D to F, respectively. The name is attached. In the production type M, after the end screen of the extra bonus is displayed, the production video of “end screen-reverse” indicating that the character is turned upside down is displayed. In the effect type N, an effect screen of “no effect” that does not show the state of the effect is displayed. Note that the opponent characters are not limited to those described above, and as shown in the character type lottery table in FIG. In addition, the opponent's character may appear in an upside down or left / right reversed posture, or a plurality of characters may appear. Further, the object is not limited to that described above, and for example, an object indicating the moon may appear or a plurality of objects may appear.

  The extra bonus production rules in this embodiment are as follows. Basically, until the effect animation of “character appearance failure” corresponding to the effect type C is displayed, the effect types D to F showing the situation where the character of “Don-chan” won the match by the tug of war with the cow character. , J to L, the effect animation of “character appearance success” is displayed for each round, and the added number displayed at that time is added. Characters and objects related to “combos” of performance types E, F, K, and L, when winning two or more times consecutively in a tug-of-war match, that is, a “character appearance success” effect corresponding to performance types D and J It may appear when a moving image is displayed continuously for two or more rounds. When the effect animation of “character appearance success” corresponding to the effect types D and J is continuously displayed for four or more rounds, the characters and objects related to the “combo” of the effect types E, F, K, and L are sure to be displayed. Appears. When the effect animation of “character appearance success” corresponding to the effect types D and J is continuously displayed for three or more rounds, an additional number equal to or greater than the additional number displayed in the immediately preceding round is displayed. The production video “Reviving Aoi” corresponding to the production types J to L was displayed before the production video of “Character Appearance Success”, and was displayed immediately before “Character Appearance Failure” corresponding to the Production Type C. It is displayed so as to continue the continuous number of “character appearance success”. On the other hand, the “character revival” production video corresponding to the production type I is displayed after the “character appearance failure” production video corresponding to the production type C, but the “character appearance success” displayed immediately before that. It is displayed after resetting the number of consecutive times. After the effect animations “Rebirth of Reika” and “Resurrection of Character” are displayed, the number of extras corresponding to at least four actual rounds (400 prize balls) is determined. In the effect video of “combo RUSH” corresponding to the effect type G, the additional number corresponding to “combo” is additionally displayed in accordance with the button operation.

[Additional bonus screen display example]
FIGS. 182 to 185 are views showing examples of screen display of the extra bonus. In the extra bonus, production is performed according to the flow described below. 182 to 184, as an example, the scenario number No. in the added bonus scenario table (Bb) of FIG. The example of a screen display according to 21 is shown. FIG. 185 (A) shows, as an example, scenario number No. in the added bonus scenario table (Ab) of FIG. The example of a screen display according to 16 (substantially 4R eyes) is shown. As an example, FIG. 185 (B) shows the scenario number No. in the added bonus scenario table (Ca) of FIG. The example of a screen display according to 1 (substantially 4R eyes) is shown. 185 (C) to 185 (F) show, as an example, the scenario number No. in the added bonus scenario table (Ac) in FIG. A screen display example corresponding to 1 (substantially 4R to 5R) is shown. In the description of the additional bonus below, the number of rounds in which the actual round is executed is simply referred to as “1Rth”, “2Rth”, etc., unless otherwise specified.

  First, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), at the start of the 1Rth, a title image 860 “addition bonus” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The title image 860 is displayed with the color based on the title pattern determined with reference to the title determination lottery table of FIG. 80 as the display color. Such a display color of the title image 860 may be changed by operating the effect button. For convenience, the actual number of rounds (the actual number of rounds executed) is shown in the upper left of the screen in the figure, but is not actually displayed. In the drawings described below, the number of actual rounds is similarly shown at the upper left of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), when the 1R eye is started, an effect animation 861 of “determination of initial value” using roulette is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. This production video 861 shows a state where “200”, “300”, “400”, “500”, “600”, “1500” fluctuates as the roulette appearance, and for stopping the operation of the roulette. An effect button and a meter indicating the effective period are displayed as effects. At this time, for example, if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed while the position where the roulette roll is “200” within the effective period is being moved and displayed (highly highlighted in the figure), the operation of the roulette However, instead of “200” as the outcome, the outcome corresponding to the additional number (initial value) of the effect type B defined in the additional bonus scenario table is stopped and displayed. If the pressing button 9A is not operated within the effective period, the roulette operation is automatically stopped after the effective period has elapsed, and the output corresponding to the additional number (initial value) of the effect type B is stopped and displayed. . Also, on the right end side of the display area 4A on the screen, a blue meter display unit 900 and a red meter display unit 910 are displayed so as to be adjacent to the left and right, together with an image for prompting “right-handed”. The blue meter display unit 900 displays the number of payout prize balls counted using a payout prize ball counter as a vertical bar graph, and displays the number of payout prize balls in the lower column. The red meter display unit 910 displays the total number of winning balls counted using a total winning ball counter as a vertical bar graph, and displays the total number of winning balls in the lower column. At this time, the red meter display unit 910 is presented with the total number of winning balls being “0”. On the other hand, during the execution of the substantial round including the first round, the value of the payout ball counter (the number of payout balls) is 10 each time a game ball wins the first grand prize port 36 or the second big prize port 37. Increase. As a result, the blue meter display unit 900 displays the number of paid-out winning balls in increments of 10 for each winning at the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37. FIG. 182 (B) shows a state in which “20” is displayed as the number of payout winning balls for the 1R on the blue meter display portion 900.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the effective period, or when the effective period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, the roulette operation stops. At this time, for example, when the roulette roll stops at “600”, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), an image indicating the additional number “+600” determined as the initial value is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. 862 is displayed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 2 s), “+600” as the additional number is added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910 to present “600” as the total number of winning balls. Further, FIG. 182 (C) shows a state in which “600” is added and displayed on the red meter display portion 910 while the added number “+600” is displayed on the screen for convenience. After the additional number is displayed on the screen, the additional number is added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910 in accordance with the switching of the additional number to non-display. On the other hand, on the blue meter display unit 900, for example, “40” is presented as the number of payout winning balls as a result of adding and displaying 10 paying out balls for each winning prize before the end of the actual round. If the actual number of winnings at the end of the actual round is less than the maximum number of winnings per round, the blue meter display unit 900 once displays a numerical value of less than 100 as the number of payout balls. Even in this case, the value corresponding to the upper limit number of payout balls (100) is added to the payout ball counter by adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the payout ball counter. As a result, the blue meter display unit 900 is presented with “100” as the number of payout balls for the 1R. Further, when the actual number of winnings exceeds the maximum number of winnings per round, the value of the remaining winning ball counter becomes “0”, so that the number exceeding the upper limit paying ball number is added to the paying out ball counter. There is nothing. Therefore, even in such a case, “100” is presented as the number of payout prize balls for the 1R on the blue meter display portion 900 at the end of the 1Rth, which is a substantial round. In the following description, the blue meter display unit 900 adds and displays the number of payout prize balls by “10”, and the illustration explanation about the increase in the number of payout prize balls for each substantial round is appropriately omitted. An explanation will be made mainly on the addition display of the total number of winning balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (E), at the time of execution of the 2R, an effect animation 864 of “character appearance success-no combo” corresponding to the effect type D is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The This effect animation 864 shows a state in which it is not known whether or not the opponent's character appears in the tug of war (see FIG. 182 (E)). At this time, an aura of a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the character of “Don-chan”, and an effect button and a meter for an effective period are displayed. The size of the effect button and the color of the aura are determined by lottery using the chance up lottery table of FIG. More extra numbers can be expected depending on the size of the effect buttons and the color of the aura. In addition, although illustration description is abbreviate | omitted below, when the effect | action animation of a tug-of-war is displayed, the aura and effect button determined using the chance up lottery table are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the effective period, or when the effective period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, as shown in FIG. 182 (F), the effect animation 865 showing the result is displayed. Is displayed. In this effect video 865, a state in which a cow character appears downward based on the effect type D is shown, and an additional number (addition value) “+100” corresponding to the character appearance defined in the additional bonus scenario table is presented. The Such effect videos 864, 865 are character effect pattern numbers determined using the character type lottery table of FIG. 84 (other than effect type D or J + effect type F of the next round) based on the effect type and the number of additions. No. 4 is based.

  After such effect animations 864 and 865 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 182 (G), the number “+100” of the extra number presented in the previous effect animation 865 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An image 866 is displayed. Thereafter, “+100” as the additional number is added and displayed on the red meter display portion 910, thereby presenting “700” as the total number of winning balls.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (H), when the 3R is finished and the 4R is executed, the display type 4D is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the display corresponds to the effect type D. The effect animation 867 of “Character Appearance Success-No Combo” is displayed. In this effect animation 867, the number of additions (addition value) “+50” corresponding to the character appearance defined in the additional bonus scenario table is also presented. Such effect animation 867 is the character effect pattern number No. determined using the character type lottery table of FIG. 84 (other than effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round) based on the effect type and the number of additions. . 3 is based. Although not specifically shown, after the effect animation 867 is displayed, an image showing the additional number “+50” is displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and then the additional number is added and displayed. “800” is presented as the number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (I), at the time of execution of the 5th R, through the display of the aura and effect buttons on the screen of the display area 4A, the “character appearance success-combo” corresponding to the effect type E is displayed. “Yes” effect animation 868 is displayed. In this effect animation 868, the number of additions (addition value) “+50” corresponding to the character appearance defined in the addition bonus scenario table and the number of additions (addition value) “+100” corresponding to the combo are presented. Such an effect video 868 is a character effect pattern determined using the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + added value +50 when the character appears) based on the effect type and the number of additions. No. 16 based.

  After displaying the effect animation 868, as shown in FIG. 183 (J), the addition numbers “+100” and “+50” presented in the previous effect animation 868 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An image 869 is displayed. Thereafter, “+100” and “+50”, which are the additional numbers, are added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910, thereby presenting “950” as the total number of winning balls. In addition, as an example, “480” is presented on the blue meter display unit 900 as the number of payout prize balls being executed in the 5th R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (K), at the time of execution of the 6R, the “character appearance success-combo presence” corresponding to the effect type F is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A through the display of the aura and effect buttons. The effect animation 870 of “-RUSH rush” is displayed. In this effect animation 870, the number of additions (addition value) “+50” corresponding to the character appearance specified in the addition bonus scenario table and the number of additions (addition value) “+100” corresponding to the combo are presented. An effect button suggesting that an effect of “combo RUSH” is executed in the round of is displayed. Such an effect animation 870 is a character effect pattern determined using the character type lottery table (effect type E, F, K, or L + added value +50 when the character appears) based on the effect type and the number of additions. No. However, the timing and content of adding the additional number to the red meter display unit 910 are different from those described above as described below.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (L), when a predetermined time has passed in the 6th R, the addition numbers “+100” and “+50” presented in the previous effect animation 870 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An image 871 is displayed and an effect button suggesting “combo RUSH” in the next round is continuously displayed as it is. On the red meter display unit 910, “+100” and “+50” of these additional numbers are displayed. “950” is added and displayed, and “950”, which is the same as the previous time (at the end of the 5R), is presented as the total number of winning balls. In addition, as an example, “580” is presented on the blue meter display unit 900 as the number of payout prize balls being executed in the sixth round.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (M), when the 7th time is executed, an effect animation 872 of “combo RUSH” corresponding to the effect type G is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this effect animation 872, in order to perform an effect of further adding the additional number “+100” corresponding to the combo out of the additional numbers “+100” and “+50” in the previous image 871, an effect button or an effective period A message “Battery!” Is displayed with a meter indicating. When the push operation button 9A is operated within the effective period after the display of the effect animation 872, the added number (addition value) corresponding to RUSH defined in the added bonus scenario table is within a range of “+100”. Based on the operation frequency pattern determined using the combo RUSH lottery table of FIG. 77, the additional number “+100” corresponding to the combo is “+150” → “+200” every time the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times. Is added and displayed. FIG. 183 (M) shows a state in which the additional number corresponding to the combo is added and displayed from “+100” to “+150”. Thereafter, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times based on the operation frequency pattern within the effective period, the following image is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 183 (N), at the time of execution of the 7R, in addition to the additional number “+50” corresponding to the appearance of the character presented in the previous effect animation 872 on the screen of the display area 4A, An image 873 indicating the additional number “+200” corresponding to the combo added by the combo RUSH is displayed. The extra number “+200” corresponds to the extra number corresponding to the combo presented before the execution of the “combo RUSH” effect, and “+100” of the extra number “+100” is due to the “combo RUSH” effect. It corresponds to the added amount. Thereafter, the red meter display unit 910 adds and displays all of the additional numbers “+200” and “+50”, thereby presenting “1200” as the total number of winning balls. Even if the predetermined number of operations is not reached within the effective period, or even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated at all, an additional number corresponding to “combo” and “combo RUSH” is additionally displayed. On the screen, the number of additions corresponding to the appearance of the character and the number of additions corresponding to the combo presented before the execution of the “combo RUSH” effect are left as they are, and the number of additions added by the effect of “combo RUSH” is added. It may be displayed separately.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183 (O), at the time of execution of the 8th R, the effect of “character appearance failure” corresponding to the effect type C is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A through the display of the aura and effect buttons. A moving image 874 is displayed. At this time, the added bonus scenario table does not define a value to be added as the added number to the corresponding 8R. As a result, as shown in FIG. 183 (P), at the end of the 8th R, the red meter display unit 910 does not display an image showing the effect of addition display on the screen of the display area 4A. However, the additional number is not added and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 184 (Q), when the 10th eye is started, an effect animation 875 indicating a cow character may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An aura of a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the cow character. The color of the aura is determined by lottery using the bull character revival lottery table of FIG. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 184 (Q), only the blue or green aura is displayed on the background of the cow character, and the No. of the cow character revival pattern determined based on the effect type A is shown. 1 or No. 2 is supported.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 6 s) elapses, as shown in FIG. 184 (R), “Character recovery waiting” corresponding to the effect type A is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A when the 10R is executed. An effect animation 876 is displayed. Such effect animation 876 is based on the bull character revival pattern (Nos. 1 to 4) determined using the bull character revival lottery table. Even when such effect animation 876 is displayed, although not particularly illustrated, an image showing the effect of addition display is not particularly displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the red meter display unit 910 has Addition number is not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (S), when the 11th eye is started, an effect video 877 indicating a cow character and an effect button and an effective period meter are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. There is a case. In this effect animation 877, a cow character with an aura of a predetermined color added to the background is displayed. The color of the aura and the size of the effect button are determined by lottery using the bull character revival lottery table of FIG. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 184 (S), a red aura is displayed on the background of the cow character, and an effect button having a large, medium, or small size is displayed. No. of the cow character revival pattern determined by It corresponds to any one of 5-7.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the effective period or when the effective period elapses without any operation of the pressing operation button 9A, as shown in FIG. 184 (T), the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. Displays an effect animation 878 of “character revival” corresponding to the effect type I. That is, when the effect button is displayed by the effect movie 877, the next effect movie 878 can be quickly displayed by pressing the pressing operation button 9A within the effective period. This effect animation 878 is based on the bull character revival pattern (Nos. 5 to 7) determined using the bull character revival lottery table. Thereafter, although not particularly illustrated, when the 12th and 13th executions are performed, the effect videos corresponding to the effect type D as shown in FIGS. 182 (E) to (G) are displayed and displayed as the respective effect videos. The predetermined additional number is added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and finally "1500" is presented on the red meter display unit 910 as the total number of winning balls that matches the total number defined in the additional bonus scenario table. It will be. Thereafter, even when the 14th and 15th eyes are executed, “1500” is presented on the red meter display unit 910 as the total number of winning balls.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), for example, at the time of execution of the 4R, an effect video 879 of “Summer revival-no combo” corresponding to the effect type J is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. There is a case. FIG. 185 (A) shows a state in which only the “凛 花” character is initially displayed. According to the effect movie 879 based on the effect type J, after the character “凛 花” is displayed, the effect movies as shown in FIGS. 182 (E) to (G) are displayed and are defined in the additional bonus scenario table. In addition, the additional number (added value) “+100” corresponding to the appearance of the character “加 算 花” is added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910. Such effect animation 879 is a character effect pattern number No. determined using the character type lottery table (except for effect type D or J + the effect type F of the next round) in FIG. 84 based on the effect type and the number of additions. . 4 is based. Although not shown in the drawing, “500” is presented as the total number of winning balls by adding and displaying “+100” as the additional number on the red meter display unit 910 thereafter.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), for example, when the 4R is executed, an effect animation 880 of “SP character appearance” corresponding to the effect type H may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . In this effect animation 880, the number of additions (addition value) “+1100” corresponding to the appearance of the character defined in the additional bonus scenario table is presented. Such an effect animation 880 has a character effect pattern number No. determined using the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) in FIG. 82 based on the effect type and the number of additions. 2 is based. Although not shown in particular, thereafter, the red meter display unit 910 is additionally displayed with “+1100” as the additional number, thereby presenting “1500” that has reached the upper limit as the total number of winning balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 185 (C), for example, when the 4R is executed, an effect animation 881 of “character appearance failure” corresponding to the effect type C may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . This effect animation 881 is a character effect pattern number No. determined using the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) in FIG. Based on 1. Thereafter, at the time of execution of the 5th R, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect image 882 indicating an end screen message such as “Additional bonus end yet!” Is displayed. At this time, the display of the blue meter display unit 900 and the red meter display unit 910 is temporarily erased on the screen of the display area 4A. Such an effect image 882 is displayed in the early stage when the short opening of the hit pattern 5 at the 5Rth is repeatedly executed a plurality of times. In addition, the effect image 882 is the No. of the end display pattern determined using the bonus bonus end screen lottery table in FIG. 3, but this effect image 882 is displayed as the first half of the “End Screen-Reverse” effect video corresponding to the effect type M. By displaying such an effect image 882, the player receives the impression that the bonus has ended, although the bonus has not ended internally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (E), when the second half of the 5R (immediately before the first middle release), the “end screen-reverse” corresponding to the effect type M is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An effect video 883 that shows a state where the character is turned upside down is displayed as the effect video. In this effect animation 883, “+1100” that reaches the upper limit is presented as the number of additions (addition value) corresponding to the character appearance defined in the additional bonus scenario table.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (F), an image 884 showing “+1100” as the number of additions presented in the previous effect animation 883 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, the additional number “+1100” is added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910, whereby “1500” that has reached the upper limit as the total number of winning balls is presented.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the first big prize opening 36 is controlled to change to an open state and a closed state multiple times in at least one round game, while the second The big prize opening 37 is controlled so that the V winning in the specific area 38A can be easily released in at least one round game, and the second big prize opening 37 is specified in at least one other round game. Control is made so as to make a short opening that makes it difficult to win V in the area 38A. As a result, while the round game in the big hit game state is executed a plurality of times using the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37, the number of executions of the round game can be made difficult to recognize. The long winning opening of the special winning opening 37 can facilitate the transition to the probable gaming state.

  In addition, as a big hit game state, a big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern 2) preceded by a round game that is short-opened rather than a round game that is long open for the second big winning opening 37 can be executed. Contrary to this, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit patterns 4 to 11) preceded by the round game that becomes longer open than the round game that becomes short opening for the second big winning opening 37 can be executed. In other words, the timing (number of rounds) at which a long-open round game that facilitates transition to a probabilistic gaming state is executed can be made different for the 1R or 11R rounds. It can enhance interest.

  Further, according to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33 in which the game ball has won, the above-described large winning port opening / closing pattern (hit pattern 2) or the big winning port opening / closing pattern (hit patterns 4 to 11) can be executed. Since the execution timing (number of rounds) of a round game with a long opening that makes it easy to shift to a probabilistic gaming state can be made different as the 1R or 11R, the player can determine the number of rounds that will be released long. By confirming, it is easy to determine which of the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is in a state in which the corresponding big winning port opening / closing pattern has been executed based on the winning of the game ball. Can be recognized.

  In addition, when the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is not detected for a predetermined time (approximately 13 s) after the second big winning opening 37 starts to open, a warning notification that prompts the V winning is performed. The player can clearly recognize the round game in which the second big prize opening 37 that is easy to shift to the probability change game state is long open even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize the number of rounds. That is, the player can surely avoid the disadvantage that the game ball is not awarded V in the specific area 38A without knowing, and the player is not shifted to the probable gaming state after the big hit gaming state.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the big hit game state, the round number is displayed by the icon 800 as the round number notification image, and the round game with easy V winning is executed in advance. When the prior notification for notifying that effect is executed using the icon 800, the display color of the icon 800 is changed according to the execution time of the prior notification. As the display color of the game changes, the staging effect is enhanced, and the player's interest in the transition to the probable game state due to the V prize is increased along with the expectation for a round game that is easy to win a V game, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be made.

  Note that a gaming machine in which only one grand prize opening is provided and a specific area in which a V prize can be awarded is provided inside the special prize opening has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained. In addition, even in a gaming machine that determines the transition to the probability variation gaming state according to the type of winning symbol without using a specific area where V winning can be won, when a round game that is easy to win is executed, the fact is notified. The display color of the icon can be changed according to whether or not the number of rounds to be played corresponds, and in such a case, the same effect as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, since the display color of the icon 800 is changed every time a round game is executed in the big hit game state, the staging effect can be enhanced step by step according to the number of rounds.

  In addition, the display color of the icon 800 is associated with the number of rounds, and the display color of the icon 800 is determined depending on whether or not the number of rounds corresponds to the execution time of the prior notification. The icon pattern can be determined so as to change the display color of the icon 800 until the player can gradually increase the expectation for a round game with easy V winning every time the round game is executed.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins V in the specific area 38A during the big hit game state, the game proceeds to the probability change game state after the big hit game state ends, and the big hit game state In each round game, the total number of winning balls is displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and after the round game (1R in the present embodiment) in which V winning is easy, the total prize displayed within the total number range. The number of balls is changed. As a result, in the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the probability variation gaming state is made conscious, and unless the total number of winning balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910 reaches the total number scheduled for the jackpot gaming state, Since it will be difficult to understand how long the big hit gaming state will continue, it is possible to enjoy the gameability due to the V prize and the gameability that makes it difficult to understand the continuation of the big hit gaming state, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that a gaming machine in which only one grand prize opening is provided and a specific area in which a V prize can be awarded is provided inside the special prize opening has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained.

  In addition, during the execution of a real round game, a blue meter displays the number of prize balls that are paid out or scheduled to be paid out every time a game ball wins a prize in the first grand prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 Although the number of winning balls corresponding to the portion exceeding the upper limit winning number is not displayed as the payout winning ball number while being displayed in the portion 900, the total number of winning balls finally displayed on the red meter display portion 910 And the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter display unit 900 can be prevented from inconsistent.

  Further, during the execution of the real round game, even if the game ball has not won until the upper limit winning number is exceeded with respect to the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37, the quantity corresponding to the upper winning number. Is displayed as the number of payout prize balls, and even in such a case, the total prize ball number finally displayed on the red meter display section 910 and the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter display section 900 are inconsistent. Can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, as a big hit gaming state in which a round game is executed a plurality of times, a round game with a possibility of winning V is executed twice, and only the first round game is played in the V The first big hit game state (corresponding to the winning patterns 4 to 12) with easy round winning and the second big hit gaming state (only corresponding to the win pattern 2) with only the last round game V round winning game easy ) And a third big hit game state (corresponding to the hit pattern 1) in which all of the two round games are round games that are easy to win V. That is, in the first to third jackpot game states, since the number of rounds in which a round game with easy V-winning is executed is different, it is possible to improve the gameability of making it difficult to understand the round game with easy V-winning. As a result, the monotony of the big hit gaming state can be eliminated. Note that a gaming machine in which only one grand prize opening is provided and a specific area in which a V prize can be awarded is provided inside the special prize opening has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained.

  Specifically, in the first jackpot gaming state, a round game that is easy to win a V is executed only in the first R based on the winning patterns 4 to 12, and in the second jackpot gaming state, the winning pattern 2 is changed to the winning pattern 2. Based on the 11th R, a round game with easy V winning is executed. In the third jackpot gaming state, a round game with easy V winning is executed in both the 1R and 11R. That is, in the third big hit game state, even if the game ball cannot be awarded V in the specific area 38A in the 1Rth, the game shifts to the probability change game state by making the game ball V win in the specific area 38A in the 11th round. Can be made. Thus, in the third jackpot gaming state, the round game can be executed more advantageously for the player than in the first and second jackpot gaming states, and the player can execute such third jackpot gaming state. Game can be advanced while expecting.

  In addition, since the player can recognize the number of rounds of a round game with easy V winning according to various performance patterns, it is possible to clearly notify that a round game with easy V winning is executed. It is possible to recognize the number of rounds in which an easy V winning round game is executed.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the warning notification that prompts the V prize is performed, thereby avoiding the disadvantage that the game state is not shifted to the probability change gaming state without knowing. The following effects can also be obtained. That is, when a round game with easy V winning is performed at the 1R and 11R (in the case of the winning pattern 1), even if the V winning to the specific area 38A is not detected at the first 1R, the last 11R Since the warning notification for urging the V-winning to the specific area 38A is performed with the eyes, such warning notification can be executed at an appropriate timing without unnecessary.

  Further, during the execution of the round game with easy V winning, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A until the predetermined time (10 s) elapses after the displacement member 39 is opened, the specific area 38A is entered. Warning notification that prompts the player to pass the game ball (V prize) is performed, so that such warning notification is appropriately performed without performing the game ball when the displacement member 39 is closed and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A. It can be executed at the timing.

  In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A from the start of the period in which the displacement member 39 is in the open state and the V winning to the specific area 38A becomes easy until the predetermined time (10 s) elapses. Since the warning notification that prompts the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A (V winning) is performed, such warning notification is executed at an appropriate timing at which V winning in the specific area 38A becomes easier. be able to.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 186 is a perspective view showing a big prize opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 186 is provided with only one big prize opening.

  As shown in FIG. 186, a special prize opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. A ball passage 37 </ b> B for guiding a game ball downward is formed inside the special winning opening 37. A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided at the lower end of the spherical passage 37B so as to be adjacent to the left and right. A prize winning count switch 370 is disposed at a position entering the ball path from the prize winning opening 37. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 'that can be displaced to the left and right is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A and the non-specific region 38B in the spherical passage 37B. In FIG. 186, the position indicated by the solid line of the displacement member 39 'is the position after the displacement, and in FIG. 186, the position indicated by the phantom line of the displacement member 39' is the initial position.

  The displacement member 39 'switches the specific region 38A to an open state or a closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 186, when the displacement member 39 ′ is at the leftmost fixed position farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and the V-winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is made. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39 ′ forms a gap through which the game ball can pass sufficiently between the right side wall of the ball passage 37 </ b> B. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 ′, and can pass through the specific region 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39 'is in the left fixed position, a gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the left wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 'and pass through the non-specific region 38B.

  When the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member that allows the game ball to pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member that prevents the game ball from passing through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be placed at any one of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is placed at the second position, the game ball will always pass through the specific area if a prize is placed in the big prize opening, which is more advantageous for the player than that according to the first embodiment described above. Game mode can be provided.

  On the other hand, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 186, when the displacement member 39 ′ is at the right fixed position closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A is closed. The V prize is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39 'forms a gap through which the game ball can pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the space between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 ′, and must always pass through the non-specific region 38B. Become.

  Even a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39 ′ can be shifted to a probable gaming state or the like after the big hit gaming state in which the V winning in the specific area 38 </ b> A has been successfully completed in the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 187 is a view showing a special winning opening / closing pattern (modification) of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the special winning opening / closing pattern of FIG. 187. It should be noted that the special winning opening opening / closing pattern and the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 186.

  As shown in FIG. 187, the modified example of the special prize opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the special prize opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 11, and is applied to one special prize opening provided with a specific area. It is a possible big opening and closing pattern. In such a special winning opening / closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 188, as an example, the displacement member 39 ′ for opening / closing the specific area 38A is activated only at the 1R and 11R positions, and is at the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. It will be in a certain state. On the other hand, in the 2nd to 10Rth and 12th to 16th R, the displacement member 39 'is in an unactuated state and is in a position indicated by a virtual line in FIG. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a big winning opening / closing pattern is applied to one big winning opening, the same effect as that of the first embodiment described above can be realized.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is a pachinko gaming machine in which only one big winning opening is provided but no specific area is provided, and the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to a probable gaming state according to the type of jackpot symbol Applies to

  As shown in FIG. 189, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence or absence of start memory. In this process, if the main CPU determines that there is no memory for starting the special symbol game, that is, if no data is stored in the special symbol starting storage area (0) to the special symbol starting storage area (4), the data is stored. This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S1001.

  In S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this processing, depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU uses a high probability jackpot determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values or a low probability block with a small number of jackpot determination values. Refer to the jackpot determination table. Also, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random number value in the special symbol start storage area and the selected jackpot determination table, which are extracted when the game ball is won. The main CPU determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. In other words, the main CPU determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, either the big hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S1002.

  In S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the determination result in S1001 is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S1003. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, if it determines that it is not a big hit, the process moves to S1000.

  In S1003, the main CPU controls the big hit gaming state. That is, the main CPU performs a special winning opening open display command, a special winning opening open data setting, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S1004.

  In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the big hit gaming state executed in S1003 is based on a special symbol for the probable big hit. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol for the probable big hit, the process proceeds to S1006. If it is determined that the symbol is not based on the special symbol for the probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to S1005.

  In S1005, the main CPU performs control of the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state that started the control in S1003. In other words, in the big hit gaming state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation big hit, the game shifts to the non-probable variation gaming state after the end. When shifting to such a non-probability game state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

  In S1006, the main CPU controls the probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state that started the control in S1003. In other words, in the jackpot gaming state based on the special symbol for the probability variation jackpot, the game always shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end. When shifting to such a probability change game state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

  In a pachinko gaming machine to which such special symbol control processing is applied, by providing the same production mode as in the first embodiment described above, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for easy round winning to the big winning opening. it can.

  Next, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, which has substantially the same configuration as that according to the first embodiment described above and additionally realizes different gaming characteristics and specifications, refer to FIGS. Detailed description. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Game board]
FIG. 190 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the drawing, a first passage gate 35A and a second passage gate 35B are provided on the left side and the right side of the stage 31 so as to be aimed separately by left and right. Although not particularly illustrated, a first pass gate switch is provided behind the first pass gate 35A, and a second pass gate switch is provided behind the second pass gate 35B. Basically, when left-handed, the game ball flows down the left side of the stage 31 so that it can easily pass through the first passage gate 35A, and the passage of the game ball in the first passage gate 35A is the first passage gate switch. Is detected, a predetermined detection signal corresponding thereto is supplied to the main control circuit 60. On the other hand, when a right strike is made, the game ball flows down the right side of the stage 31 so that it can easily pass through the second passage gate 35B, and the passage of the game ball in the second passage gate 35B is detected by the second passage gate switch. Then, a predetermined detection signal corresponding thereto is supplied to the main control circuit 60. The first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B are basically provided as those related to the normal symbol lottery, but in this embodiment, function as a mechanism for starting the control of the round game. In addition, it is also used as a device for allowing the player to select a special winning opening opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second start port 32 are arranged so that the game ball can start and win both the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 regardless of whether it is right-handed or left-handed. Both of the second start ports 33 are positioned lower than the second grand prize winning port 37 and the game balls flow down from both the left and right directions. As an example, the first start port 32 is adjacent to the left side of the second start port 33. It is provided to be located. According to such an arrangement of the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, for example, by making a right turn in the big hit gaming state, the upper end surface of the cover member 43 is not entered without entering the second big winning port 37. There is a possibility that the game ball that has flowed down will start and win either the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. That is, in the big hit gaming state, both the start memory related to the first special symbol and the start memory related to the second special symbol may increase. The same applies to game states other than the big hit game state.

[Big prize opening / closing pattern (hit pattern)]
FIG. 191 is a view showing a special winning opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, a winning pattern opening / closing pattern (a winning pattern) is newly defined as a winning pattern 14 in addition to the same winning patterns 1 to 13 as those in the first embodiment. This hit pattern 14 is a hit pattern that occurs when a probability variation bonus, which will be described later, is specified. The specified round number is 12R, and the actual round number is 2R. The winning pattern 14 is defined so that the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R and 11R, and the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern H in the 2nd to 10R and 12R. ing. That is, in the winning pattern 14, only 1R and 11R correspond to substantial round games, and the probability variation game is executed by executing V winning in the specific area 38A in both 1R and 11R as easy rounds. It is executed as an opening / closing pattern that can be easily shifted to a state.

[Hit symbol determination table]
FIG. 192 is a diagram showing a winning symbol determination table of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The winning symbol determination table is stored in the main ROM 62, and is referred to in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 102) of the main CPU 61. As shown in the figure, as the winning symbol determination table, the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol) related to the first special symbol and the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) related to the second special symbol. ) And a table for determining a small hit symbol related to the second special symbol (second special symbol). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the main CPU 61 determines that the big hit is won in the big hit determination process (see S178 in FIG. 101), the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol) Alternatively, when the big hit symbol is determined using the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) and the main CPU 61 determines that the big hit symbol is determined in the small hit determination process (see S179 in FIG. 101), the small hit symbol determination is performed. The small hit symbol is determined using the table (second special symbol). The big hit determination process and the small hit determination process are executed by random lottery that extracts a predetermined random number from a random number range of 0 to 65535, for example. For example, in the non-probability game state, the jackpot probability is relatively low 1 / 239.18 (274/65536), and if any random number from 0 to 273 defined as the jackpot determination value is extracted, Winning. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot probability is set to 1 / 81.92 (800/65536), and if a random number of 0 to 799 defined as the jackpot determination value is extracted, the jackpot winning It becomes. In addition, in the case of not winning a big hit in either the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state, the small hit probability is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536), and any of 800 to 1018 defined as the small hit judgment value. If such a random number is extracted, a small win is won. If random numbers other than these are extracted, it is a loss that is neither a big win or a small win.

  The jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol) can be given according to the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 and the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 that can be determined when the result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a winning jackpot. The number of time reductions (100 times or 30 times) and lottery value information (selection rate) for determining the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 by random lottery are defined. The lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, FIG. 192 shows the selection rate. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol), the jackpot symbol 1 is determined as the first special symbol with the probability that the selection rate is 5/100 and the number of time reductions is 100 times. Is given, the jackpot symbol 2 is determined as the first special symbol with a probability of 45/100 selection, and 30 times are assigned as the number of time reductions, and the first special symbol with the probability of a selection rate of 50/100 The big hit symbol 3 is determined and 30 times are given as the number of time reductions. In addition, the number of time reductions is given as a condition of winning a big hit in the non-time saving gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the condition is finished, the probability change gaming state (ST gaming state) is not changed. It is stipulated that it is granted only when the game state is entered.

  The jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol) corresponds to the jackpot symbols 1, 2, 4 that can be determined when the result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is a jackpot winning, and the jackpot symbols 1, 2, 4 And a lottery value information (selection rate) for determining the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 by random lottery. Also in the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol), the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99). Reference numeral 192 indicates the selectivity. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol), the jackpot symbol 1 is determined as the second special symbol with the probability that the selection rate is 8/100, and the number of time reductions is 100 times. Is given, the jackpot symbol 2 is determined as the second special symbol with a probability of 2/100 selection, and 30 times are given as the number of time reductions, and the second special symbol with the probability of 90/100 selection rate The big hit symbol 4 is determined and 100 times are given as the number of time reductions. In addition, the number of hours and hours given using the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol) is also given as a condition of winning the jackpot in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the termination of the jackpot gaming state according to the condition After that, it is defined that it is given only when a transition is made to the non-probability changing gaming state without shifting to the probability changing gaming state (ST gaming state).

  The small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) is used to determine the small hit symbol that can be determined when the result of the small hit determination related to the second special symbol is a small winning symbol, and the small hit symbol by random lottery. Lottery value information (selection rate). Also in the small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99). FIG. 192 shows the selectivity. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the small hit symbol is determined as the second special symbol with a probability that the selection rate is 100/100. It should be noted that since the gaming state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small-hit gaming state triggered by the small-hit winning, the number of time reductions corresponding to the small-hit symbol is not specified.

  By having such a jackpot symbol determination table, in this embodiment, the specifications relating to the short-time gaming state are different from those according to the first embodiment described above. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the probabilistic gaming state (ST gaming state) is shifted to after the jackpot gaming state ends, as in the first embodiment described above, the number of games (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is 190 times. The probability variation gaming state continues until this time, and the short-time gaming state continues in conjunction with the probability variation gaming state until the game is completed 190 times. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the non-short-time gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state is entered accordingly, and the player enters the non-probable gaming state after the jackpot gaming state cannot be entered. Are in the short-time gaming state where the number of time reductions is up to 100 times or 30 times according to the big hit symbols specified in the big hit symbol determination table. However, if you win a big hit in the short-time gaming state and become a big hit gaming state accordingly, if you change to the non-probable variable gaming state without being able to shift to the probable gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, Without relying on the jackpot symbol determination table, the time-saving game state is always up to 100 times.

  Note that the jackpot symbol 1 defined in the jackpot symbol determination table corresponds to the combination of the decoration symbol “3” or “7”, and the jackpot symbol 2 has the ornament symbol “1” or “5”. ”, The jackpot symbol 3 corresponds to the combination pattern“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”, or“ 6 ”, and the jackpot symbol 4 has the decoration symbol“ 8 ”corresponds to the combination mode.

[Hit pattern selection table]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a hit pattern selection table for the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. This winning pattern selection table is stored in the main ROM 62, and is referred to in the winning pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 197) of the winning pattern selection process of the main CPU 61 described later. As shown in the figure, the winning pattern selection table includes a winning pattern selection table according to jackpot symbol 1 (big hit symbol 1), a winning pattern selection table according to jackpot symbol 2 (big hit symbol 2), and a big hit symbol. A winning pattern selection table related to the symbol 3 (big hit symbol 3) and a winning pattern selection table related to the big hit symbol 4 (big hit symbol 4) are provided. In the present embodiment, when a big hit symbol is determined by the main CPU 61 in the special symbol determination process, a hit pattern selection table corresponding to the determined big hit symbol is referred to.

  The winning pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1) is a random number lottery of the winning pattern 1 that can be determined based on the value of the gate passing flag ("01H" and "02H"), which will be described later, and the big hit symbol 1, and the winning pattern 1 The lottery value information (selection rate) to be determined is defined. Note that the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value in a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, FIG. 193 shows the selection rate. Similarly, the other tables shown in FIG. The gate passing flag is set to “01H” when the first passing gate switch detects the passing of the game ball after the big hit symbol is determined, while the first passing gate switch sets the value to “1H”. This is an internal flag whose value is set to “02H” when the passing of a game ball is detected. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1), when the big hit symbol 1 is determined and the gate passing flag is either “01H” or “02H”, The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability that the selectivity is 100/100.

  The winning pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) includes gate pass flag values ("01H" and "02H") to be described later, hit patterns 1 to 3 and 14 that can be determined based on the big hit symbol 2, and hit patterns It defines lottery value information (selection rate) for determining 1 to 3 and 14 by random lottery. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2), when the big hit symbol 2 is determined and the gate passing flag is “01H”, the selection rate is 5 / The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability of 100, and the hit pattern 14 is determined with a probability of a selection rate of 95/100. Further, in the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2), when the big hit symbol 2 is determined and the gate passing flag is “02H”, the selection rate is 2 The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability of / 100, the hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability of 3/100, and the hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability of 95/100. That is, when the big hit gaming state is started based on the big hit symbol 2, if the game ball preferentially passes through the first passing gate 35A on the left side, there is a high possibility that it becomes a probability variation bonus of the hit pattern 14, and a substantial round Although the number is small, it is likely that a big hit gaming state that easily shifts to the probability-changing gaming state is likely due to the possibility of V winning in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, if the game ball preferentially passes through the second passing gate 35B on the right side, there is a high possibility that it becomes a challenge bonus of the hit pattern 3, and although it is difficult to shift to the probability variation game state, the big hit is generally large in number of rounds. The likelihood of becoming a gaming state increases.

  The winning pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3) is a random number lottery of the winning pattern 3 that can be determined based on the value of the gate passing flag ("01H" and "02H") described later, the big hit symbol 3, and the winning pattern 3 The lottery value information (selection rate) to be determined is defined. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3), when the big hit symbol 3 is determined and the gate passing flag is either "01H" or "02H" The hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability that the selectivity is 100/100.

  The winning pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4) includes gate pass flag values ("01H" and "02H") to be described later, hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 that can be determined based on the big hit symbol 4, and hit patterns It defines lottery value information (selection rate) for determining 1, 4 to 12 by random lottery. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4), when the big hit symbol 4 is determined and the gate passing flag is either "01H" or "02H" The hit pattern 1 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 10/100, the hit pattern 4 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 8/100, and the hit pattern 5 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 1/100. The hit pattern 6 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 1/100, the hit pattern 7 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 4/100, and the hit pattern 8 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 11/100. The hit pattern 9 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 30/100, the hit pattern 10 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 5/100, and the selectivity is 20/100. Rate per pattern 11 is determined by, per pattern 12 is determined by the probability that the selected rate is 10/100.

  Also in the present embodiment, when the round game in the big hit game state is executed according to the hit pattern, the same effect mode as the first embodiment described above is executed, but the first embodiment described above. Different presentation modes may be executed.

[Starting storage area in sub-control circuit]
FIG. 194 is a view for explaining a start storage area in the sub control circuit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the work RAM 73 of the sub-control circuit 70 has a start memory area for storing the hold information regarding the special symbol game as the start memory, similarly to the main RAM 63 of the main control circuit 60. . The start memory related to the first special symbol is stored in the first start memory area 731, and the start memory related to the second special symbol is stored in the second start memory area 732. The first start memory area 731 has an 8-bit start memory area (1-1) and a start memory area (1-2). The second start memory area 732 also has an 8-bit start memory area (2). -1) and a startup storage area (2-2).

  As shown in FIG. 194, the start-up memory itself is composed of 4 bits. In the present embodiment, based on the information indicating the winning determination random number and the information indicating the winning symbol determination random number included in the start winning command, the big hit symbol or the small hit or loss at the time of probability change or non-probability change is shown and the big hit symbol The start-up memory is expressed by a 4-bit binary code so as to indicate the type. The start winning command includes information indicating which of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 is the starting winning combination. For example, as the expression contents of the start memory related to the first special symbol, “0001” is a loss, “0010” is a “big hit symbol 1” big hit when the probability is changed, and “0011” is a “big hit symbol when the probability is changed or not changed. “1” big hit, “0100” is a big hit symbol 2 big hit when the probability is changed, “0101” is a big hit symbol 2 big hit when the probability is changed or non-probable, “0111” is a “big hit symbol 3” big hit when the probability is changed, “1000” corresponds to “big hit symbol 3” big hit at the time of probability change or non-probability change. As the expression contents of the start memory relating to the second special symbol, “0001” is lost, “0010” is a “big hit symbol 1” big hit when the probability is changed, and “0011” is “big hit symbol 1” when the probability is changed or not changed. Big hit, "0100" is a big hit "Big hit symbol 2" big hit, "0101" is a big hit symbol 2 big hit when the probability is changed or non-probable, "0111" is a big hit symbol 4 big hit, "1000" ”Corresponds to the“ big hit symbol 4 ”big hit at the time of probability change or non-probable change, and“ 1001 ”corresponds to the small hit. The free space is “0000”.

  Such start memory is written, for example, in order from the smallest start memory number assigned to the first start memory area 731 and from the empty area of the upper 4 bits. In the first start memory area 731, the start memory is read from the upper 4 bits of the start memory area (1-1), and the start memory to be subsequently read is changed from the start memory area (1-2) to the start memory area (1 -1), and further shifted from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits. The start memory in the second start memory area 732 is the same. That is, in the first start memory area 731 and the second start memory area 732, the start memories are read in order from the oldest in the FIFO method. However, when the start memory coexists in both the first start memory area 731 and the second start memory area 732, the start memory is preferentially read from the second start memory area 732.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 194, the first start storage area 731 includes the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), and the start storage area (1- 2) in the order of the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (1-2), “0001” (losing), “0001” (losing), “0001” (losing), “1000” (when the probability changes or “Big hit symbol 3” big hit) at the time of non-probability change is stored. The second start storage area 732 includes the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (2-1), the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (2-1), the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (2-2), In the order of the lower 4 bits of the starting storage area (2-2), “0001” (losing), “0010” (“big hit symbol 1” big hit at the time of probability change), “0000” (free area), “0000” (free) Area) is stored. In this case, assuming that no further starting memory is generated, the big hit gaming state corresponding to “big hit symbol 1” is set based on the starting memory “0010” in the second starting storage area 732, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, Specifically, the game state shifts to a probability change game state, and in this probability change game state, the game state shifts to a big hit game state corresponding to “big hit symbol 3” based on the start memory “1000” in the first start storage area 731. In the big hit game state corresponding to “big hit symbol 3”, since the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 3, information indicating the determination result of the hit that is difficult to shift to the probability variation game state is stored as the start memory. It has been done. When such start memory is stored in the first start memory area 731, in the present embodiment, this is notified. This will be described later.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 195 to 204 show processing by the main CPU 61, and FIGS. 205 to 215 show processing by the sub CPU 71. Description of processing that is the same as or similar to the processing according to the first embodiment described above is simplified or omitted as appropriate.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process of FIG. 195 is composed of substantially the same steps as the special symbol control process of FIG. 100, but the following points are greatly different. That is, the main CPU 61 executes the hit pattern selection process in S1104 after finishing the special symbol display time management process in S1103. When the process in S1104 is finished, the main CPU 61 proceeds to the hit start interval management process in S1105. Since the hit pattern selection process in S1104 is added, the control state flag value (03H) is assigned to the step in S1104, and the control state flag value corresponding to each step after S1105. Are raised one by one from the one shown in FIG. That is, the main CPU 61 determines a hit pattern when the control status flag is a value (03H) indicating hit pattern selection, and then sets a value (04H) indicating hit start interval management in the control status flag. In such a winning pattern selection process, a winning pattern corresponding to the current big hit gaming state is determined. In addition, each process of S1103 to S1109 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol variation time management process of FIG. 196 is composed of substantially the same steps as the special symbol control process of FIG. 104, but the following points are greatly different.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the main CPU 61 executes the processing of S1200 to S1203 in the same manner as S220 to S223 of FIG. 104, and after completing the processing of S1203, executes the pattern selection processing by hitting the gaming state flag in S1204. To set a value (03H) for If this process ends, the process moves to S1217.

  Further, the main CPU 61 executes the processing of S1205 to S1214 in the same manner as S224 to S233 of FIG. 104, and if it is determined in S1214 that the game is a small hit, the main CPU 61 hits the gaming state flag to indicate a value indicating the start interval management processing ( 04H) is set (S1215). If this process ends, the process moves to S1216.

  Then, the main CPU 61 executes the processing of S1216 to S1218 similarly to S234 to S236 of FIG. 104, or sets the value (08H) indicating the special symbol game end processing of S1219 similarly to S238 of FIG. Execute the process set to. When these processes are finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  That is, after the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process is set in the control state flag in S1204, the waiting time timer is not set and the next control state flag value (04H) is determined until the hit pattern is determined. ) Is not set. After the processing of S1204, it is configured to set a waiting time timer, and when a hit pattern is not determined when the set waiting time timer becomes 0, any hit pattern is forcibly set. You may make it select.

  If it is determined in S1214 that a small hit is made, the hit pattern 13 is uniquely determined. In S1215, a value (04H) indicating a hit start interval management process is set in the control state flag. The In addition, a plurality of hit patterns corresponding to each type are provided along with a plurality of types of small hits, and any hit pattern from the hit patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of small hits is also performed by executing the hit pattern selection process. May be determined.

[Pattern selection processing]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a hit pattern selection process executed by the main CPU 61. This winning pattern selection process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 197, in S1300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit pattern selection process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S1301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit pattern selection process routine.

  In S1301, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the gate passage flag is “00H”. The gate passage flag is an internal flag indicating which of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B is the one in which the passage of the game ball is detected first. When the gate passing flag is “00H”, it indicates that the passing of the game ball is not detected in any of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B. Further, when the gate passing flag is “01H”, it indicates that the first passing gate 35A has been detected to pass the game ball first, and when the gate passing flag is “02H”, the second passing gate 35B is the highest. It indicates that the passing of a game ball is detected first. When determining that the value of the gate passage flag is “00H”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit pattern selection processing routine. When determining that the value is not “00H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S1302.

  In S1302, the main CPU 61 extracts a winning pattern determination random number, and executes a winning pattern determination process based on the random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a winning pattern selection table corresponding to the big winning symbol as the special symbol determined in the special symbol determining process (see FIG. 102), and determines the value of the gate passing flag and the extracted winning pattern. The winning pattern is determined based on the random number. Here, in the case of jackpot symbol 1, 3 or 4, the type of hit pattern that can be determined is not changed even if the value of the gate passing flag is “01H” or “02H”, but in the case of jackpot symbol 2 If the value of the gate passage flag is “01H”, one of the hit patterns 1 and 14 is determined, while if the value of the gate pass flag is “02H”, one of the hit patterns 1 to 3 is determined. Is determined, and the type of the hit pattern is changed according to the value of the gate passage flag. As a result, when the player wishes to have a higher possibility of shifting to the probability change gaming state when starting the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2, the player plays the game first with respect to the first passing gate 35A. If you want to make a left turn to pass the ball, or if you want more balls, you can make a right turn to pass the game ball first to the second pass gate 35B. Can be done. When the process of S1302 is completed, the process proceeds to S1303.

  In step S1303, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting data indicating the determined winning pattern. Displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the data indicating the hit pattern and the displacement member operation pattern data. If this process ends, the process moves to S1304.

  In step S <b> 1304, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a hit pattern determination command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This winning pattern determination command is data indicating the start of the round game. The hit pattern determination command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S1305.

  In step S <b> 1305, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a wait timer value (for example, 5 seconds) as a hit start interval time corresponding to the determined hit pattern in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S1306.

  In S <b> 1306, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S1307.

  In step S1307, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the gate passage flag to “00H”. If this process ends, the process moves to S1308.

  In S1308, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the random number for determining the hit pattern used for the hit pattern determining process, and ends the hit pattern selecting process routine.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process shown in FIG. 198 includes substantially the same steps as the hit start interval management process shown in FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1400 and S1407 shown in FIG. 198 are merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1400 to S1411 are the processes of S240 to S251 shown in FIG. Is substantially the same.

[Waiting time management process before reopening of big prize opening]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening in FIG. 199 is configured by substantially the same steps as the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening in FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1500 and S1504 shown in FIG. 199 are merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1500 to S1508 are the processes of S260 to S268 shown in FIG. Is substantially the same.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. The processing for opening a special prize opening in FIG. 200 is configured by substantially the same steps as the processing for opening a special prize opening in FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1600, S1611, and S1614 shown in FIG. 200 are merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1600 through S1615 are performed in S270 through FIG. This is substantially the same as the process of S285.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process in FIG. 201 is composed of substantially the same steps as the hit end interval management process in FIG. Specifically, the processing of S1700 and S1702 shown in FIG. 201 is merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag. In step S1708, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “30” or “100” as the number of time reductions corresponding to the big hit symbol in the value of the time reduction number counter in the main RAM 63. Thereby, all the processes of S1700 to S1709 are substantially the same as the processes of S290 to S299 shown in FIG. In addition, as the number of time reductions, three or more types of times may be provided, or only one type of times may be provided.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol game end process of FIG. 202 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol game end process of FIG. Specifically, the process of S1800 shown in FIG. 202 is merely applied by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1800 and S1801 are substantially the same as the processes of S300 and S301 shown in FIG. Are identical.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. The switch input process of FIG. 203 includes substantially the same steps as the switch input process of FIG. 94 and also includes newly added steps. Specifically, the processing of S1900 to S1903 shown in FIG. 203 is the same as the processing of S90 to S93 shown in FIG. 94, and after the processing of S1903, the main CPU 61 performs the gate switch check processing of S1904. It is configured. This gate switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Gate switch check processing]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the gate switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This gate switch check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in S2000, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit pattern selection process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit pattern selection process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S2001. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the main switch 61 ends the gate switch check process routine.

  In step S2001, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the gate passage flag is “00H”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passing flag is “00H”, that is, when the hit pattern selection process is executed, the main CPU 61 passes both the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B. Is not detected yet, the process proceeds to S2002. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the gate passage flag is not “00H”, the main CPU 61 ends the gate switch check processing routine.

  In S2002, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the passage of the game ball at the first passage gate 35A is detected based on the detection signal from the first passage gate switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball at the first passage gate 35A is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S2003 and determines that the passage of the game ball at the first passage gate 35A is not detected. In the case, the process proceeds to S2005.

  In step S <b> 2003, the main CPU 61 performs processing for acquiring a hit pattern determining random number and storing the hit pattern determining random number in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 63. After this process ends, the process moves to S2004.

  In step S2004, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the gate passage flag to “01H”. Thereby, the main CPU 61 recognizes that the game ball has passed first with respect to the first passage gate 35A. When this process is finished, the gate switch check process routine is finished.

  In S2005, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the passing of the game ball at the second passage gate 35B is detected based on the detection signal from the second passage gate switch. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball at the second passage gate 35B is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S2006 and determines that the passage of the game ball at the second passage gate 35B is not detected. In that case, the gate switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 2006, the main CPU 61 performs processing for acquiring a hit pattern determining random number and storing the hit pattern determining random number in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 63. After this process ends, the process moves to S2007.

  In S2007, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the gate passage flag to “02H”. Thereby, the main CPU 61 recognizes that the game ball has passed through the second passage gate 35B first. When this process is finished, the gate switch check process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
205 and 206 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis processing is configured by processing generally similar to the command analysis processing shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, but differs in the following points. In the following description, although there is an overlap with the description of the command analysis processing shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, all the processing shown in FIGS. 205 and 206 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in S2100, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, it moves the process to S2101. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S <b> 2101, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2102.

  In step S2102, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in step S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S2103. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S2105.

  In S2103, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the decorative symbol variation display mode is determined. If this process ends, the process moves to S2104.

  In step S2104, the sub CPU 71 performs a start memory number update process. This starting memory number updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In step S2105, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in step S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2106. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2107.

  In step S2106, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example, When three (three digits)) are arranged with the same decorative symbols (numbers), the game is basically shifted to the big hit gaming state. However, the round game is not started until the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B. Specifically, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 corresponds to a numeric string that is a uniform line of “333” or “777”, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol 2 is “111”. Or, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 corresponds to the digit string corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 and corresponds to the numeral string corresponding to the marker “222”, “444”, or “666”, and the jackpot symbol. The decorative symbol corresponding to 4 corresponds to the numeric string that is the uniform of “888”, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol corresponds to the numeric string that is the specific appearance of “135”, corresponding to the loss The decorative design to be made is a numeric string that is a non-specific appearance.

  In step S2107, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a symbol stop command has been received as the command read in step S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2108. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2110.

  In step S <b> 2108, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S2109.

  In step S2109, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode number counter update processing. The effect mode number counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S2110, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a start winning command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2111. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2112.

  In step S <b> 2111, the sub CPU 71 performs a start memory number update process. This starting storage number updating process is the same as the process of S2104, and will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S2112, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command is received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2113. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2114.

  In S2113, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. This winning start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S2114, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit pattern determination command is received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit pattern determination command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S2115. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit pattern determination command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S2116.

  In S2115, the sub CPU 71 executes a pre-winner opening effect process. The effect process before opening the big prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In step S <b> 2116, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command has been received as the command read in step S <b> 2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S2117. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening opening display command as the read command, it moves the process to S2200 in FIG.

  In step S <b> 2117, the sub CPU 71 executes a special winning opening opening process. The process for opening the special winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S2200 of FIG. 206, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2201. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that no hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2202.

  In S2201, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This winning end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S2202, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command is received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2203. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S2204.

  In S2203, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode control process. This effect mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In step S2204, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a specific area passing command is received as the command read in step S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a specific area passing command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S2205. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S2206.

  In step S2205, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning notification process. The V winning notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In step S2206, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. This process includes, for example, the discharge error notification process described in the first embodiment. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Production mode number counter update processing]
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the effect mode number counter update process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode number counter update process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 207, in S2300, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag is “01H” corresponding to the effect mode corresponding to the non-probability change and the non-short game state (hereinafter referred to as “normal mode”), and the effect corresponding to the non-probability change and the time-short game state. The value corresponding to the mode (hereinafter referred to as “time reduction mode”) is “02H”, and the value corresponding to the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as “ST mode”) corresponding to the probability change and the time reduction gaming state is “03H”. Depending on the value of such an effect mode flag, the background image and the effect contents differ. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, the process proceeds to S2301. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S2302.

  In S2301, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction mode number counter. The time reduction mode number counter is a counter controlled by the sub CPU 71 and is used for counting the number of times of the time reduction mode game (number of symbol fluctuations) up to a predetermined number of times (100 times or 30 times in the present embodiment). is there. When this process ends, the effect mode number counter update process routine ends.

  In S2302, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S2303. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “03H”, this effect mode number counter update processing routine is terminated.

  In S2303, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST mode number counter. The ST mode number counter is a counter controlled by the sub CPU 71 and is used to count the number of ST mode games (the number of symbol fluctuations) up to a predetermined number of times (190 in the present embodiment). When this process ends, the effect mode number counter update process routine ends.

[Starting memory count update processing]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the start memory number update process executed by the sub CPU 71. This starting memory number updating process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 208, in S2400, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read in S2101 of FIG. 205 is a start winning command. If it is determined that the read command is a start winning command, the process proceeds to S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read command is not a start winning command, the process proceeds to S2404.

  In step S <b> 2401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start winning command corresponds to the start winning of the first start port 32 based on the information included in the read start winning command. If it is determined that the start winning command corresponds to the start winning of the first start port 32, the process proceeds to S2402. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start winning command does not correspond to the start winning of the first start port 32, that is, if it corresponds to the start winning of the second start port 33, the process proceeds to S2403.

  In S2402, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start memory addition process. In the first start memory addition process, the big win symbol related to the first special symbol is displayed together with the big win based on the information indicating the random number for winning judgment and the information showing the random number for winning symbol included in the start winning command. The start memory including information is written in the empty area of the first start memory area 731. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2403, the sub CPU 71 executes a second start memory addition process. Also in the second start memory addition process, based on the information indicating the winning determination random number and the information indicating the winning symbol determination random number included in the start winning command, the big winning symbol related to the second special symbol and the like are won. The start memory including the information to be shown is written in the empty area of the second start memory area 732. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read in S2101 of FIG. 205 is a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol. If it is determined that the read command is a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read command is not a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, that is, if it is a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S2406.

  In S2405, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start memory subtraction process. In this first start memory subtraction process, the oldest start stored in the start storage area (1-1) of the first start storage area 731 upon receipt of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol. The memory is read out. At this time, in the first start memory area 731, the remaining start memory is shifted by 4 bits. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes a second start memory subtraction process. Also in the second start memory subtraction process, the oldest stored in the start memory area (2-1) of the second start memory area 732 is triggered by the reception of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the second special symbol. The starting memory is read out. At this time, in the second start memory area 732, the remaining start memory is shifted by 4 bits. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In step S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes display mode change processing. This display mode changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the start memory number updating process routine is finished.

[Display mode change processing]
FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the display mode changing process executed by the sub CPU 71. This display mode change process is executed in units of the following steps. The display mode changing process is executed every time a start winning command or a variation pattern designation command is received, but may be executed every predetermined period (for example, every 2000 ms).

  As shown in FIG. 209, in S2500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first start-up storage storage content notification flag is “01H”. The first start memory storage content notification flag is used when a start memory indicating a predetermined big hit win (determined that a big win is won in the big hit determination process) is stored in the first start storage area. Is an internal flag for indicating that “01H” is set when notifying, and “00H” is set when not notifying. When it is determined that the value of the first startup storage memory notification flag is “01H”, the display mode change processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the first start memory storage content notification flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S2501.

  In S2501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S2502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S2507.

  In S2502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST mode number counter is 10 or less. In this process, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times in the ST mode is a small number of 10 or less. A value corresponding to the number of times other than 10 may be applied as the threshold value. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode number counter is 10 or less, the process proceeds to S2503. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode number counter is not 10 or less, the process proceeds to S2505.

  In step S2503, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a start memory corresponding to the big win in the first start storage area 731. If it is determined that there is a start memory corresponding to the big hit win in the first start memory area 731, the process proceeds to S 2504. If it is determined that there is no start memory corresponding to the big hit win in the first start memory area 731, the display mode changing process routine is ended.

  In step S2504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the first start storage memory content notification flag to “01H”. Thereby, sub CPU71 will alert | report the information which shows the jackpot winning (big hit symbol) which concerns on a 1st special symbol. When this process is finished, the display mode changing process routine is finished. Only the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot gaming state that is likely to shift to the probability variable gaming state may be notified, or only the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot gaming state that is difficult to shift to the probability varying gaming state may be reported. . In addition, whether or not to notify may be determined by lottery and notified based on the determination result.

  In S2505, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start storage area and second start storage area determination process. In this process, it is determined whether or not the start memory stored in the first start memory area 731 and the second start memory area 732 satisfies a condition (change determination condition) for changing the display mode of the start memory. The As the change determination condition, a first change determination condition having a high priority and a second change determination condition having a low priority are defined. The first change determination condition is that, in the first start memory area 731, there is a start memory including information indicating a big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3 in the probability variation gaming state, and a start memory written after the start memory is also stored. If the information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 or 2 is included in the non-probability variable gaming state in the latter start memory, the former start is irrespective of the number of start memories in the second start storage area 732 The condition is that the display mode related to storage is maintained as a normal mode. Further, the second change determination condition is that, in the first start memory area 731, there is a start memory including information indicating the big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3, and the number of start memories in the second start memory area 732 is 1 or less. In this case, for example, a notification message such as “DANGER” is displayed, and the display mode related to the former start-up memory is changed from a normal mode to a predetermined mode. In addition, after determining based on the first change determination condition or the second change determination condition, whether or not to change the display mode may be determined by lottery. Further, for example, the process of displaying the “DANGER” notification message and changing the display mode of the start memory may be performed when the start memory corresponding to the first special symbol indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is not stored. Good. Also, in response to the start memory stored in the second start memory area, a notification message “DANGER” is displayed and a process for changing the display mode of the start memory is performed, thereby corresponding to the second special symbol. You may make it alert | report that the information which shows a jackpot win is contained in the starting memory | storage. When such first start storage area and second start storage area determination processing is completed, the process proceeds to S2506. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 223 to 225, which will be described later, a prefetching effect performed in the probability variation gaming state (a prefetching effect performed when the second change determination condition is satisfied), illustrated in FIGS. As described above, there is a pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect performed when the first change determination condition is satisfied) performed when shifting from the probability variation gaming state to the short-time gaming state, and whether or not these pre-reading effects are performed. In order to determine whether or not, the process of S2505 is executed.

  In step S2506, the sub CPU 71 executes display control processing corresponding to the determination result obtained in step S2505. According to this display control process, the display mode of the start memory corresponding to the first special symbol is changed or maintained according to the determination result. When this process is finished, the display mode changing process routine is finished.

  In step S <b> 2507, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the display mode change processing routine is terminated.

  In step S2508, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the time reduction mode number counter is 15 or less. In this process, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of time-saving modes has become 15 or less. A value corresponding to the number of times other than 15 may be applied as the threshold value. Moreover, it may be smaller than the threshold value for determining the remaining number of times in the ST mode, or may be the same value. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction mode number counter is 15 or less, the process proceeds to S2509. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode number counter is not 15 or less, the display mode change processing routine is terminated.

  In step S <b> 2509, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory corresponding to the big win in the first start storage area 731. If it is determined that there is a start memory corresponding to the big hit win in the first start memory area 731, the process proceeds to S2510. If it is determined that there is no start memory corresponding to the big hit win in the first start memory area 731, the display mode changing process routine is ended.

  In step S2510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the first start storage memory content notification flag to “01H”. Thereby, sub CPU71 will alert | report the information which shows the jackpot winning (big hit symbol) which concerns on a 1st special symbol. When this process is finished, the display mode changing process routine is finished.

[Winning start effect processing]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start effect process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 210, in S2600, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting game state is a small hit. If it is determined that it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S2601. If it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to S2602.

  In step S2601, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data for small hits. Thereby, the effect image etc. according to the small hit game state are displayed. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

  In step S2602, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S2603.

  In step S2603, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Thus, for example, in the case of the jackpot symbol 2, as described in the first embodiment, a selection image for selecting the type of challenge bonus (one game, three times challenge, surprise) is displayed. If it is a big hit symbol, an effect image or the like that prompts a right strike is displayed. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

[Processing before opening the grand prize opening]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the effect process before opening the special winning opening executed by the sub CPU 71. This pre-opening of the special winning opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 211, in S2700, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the hit pattern in the hit pattern flag. The winning pattern flag is an internal flag indicating a winning pattern. If this process ends, the process moves to S2701.

  In S2701, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data corresponding to the value of the hit pattern flag. Thereby, for example, an effect image corresponding to the super big bonus or the like is displayed, and a notification indicating that the big hit is being made is performed according to the hit pattern to be executed. When this process is completed, the pre-opening pre-opening effect processing routine is ended.

[Processing when the big prize opening is open]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the sub CPU 71. The process for opening the special winning opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 212, in S2800, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S2801.

  In S2801, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to a substantial round. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 specifies the type of winning based on the value of the winning pattern flag, and determines whether or not the value of the round counter corresponds to a substantial round. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to the actual round, the process proceeds to S2802. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not a value corresponding to the actual round, the process proceeds to S2809.

  In S2802, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S2803. If it is determined that the value of the V winning notification flag is not “01H” but “00H” and the V winning notification is not performed, the process proceeds to S2809. It should be noted that the processing after S2802 may be performed at times other than the execution of the actual round (including the execution of processing other than the processing at the time of opening the big winning opening).

  In S2803, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the big hit end notification flag is “01H”. The big hit end notification flag is based on whether or not there is a start memory in the first start memory area 731 in the big hit gaming state, and the start memory contains information indicating the big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3. It is an internal flag indicating whether or not notification is performed such that the display mode according to is changed from a normal mode to a predetermined mode and a “DANGER” notification message is displayed. Such a big hit end notification flag is set to “01H” when notification is performed, and is set to “00H” when notification is not performed. If it is determined that the value of the big hit end notification flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S2803. If it is determined that the value of the big hit end notification flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S2804.

  In S2804, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is 1 or less. If it is determined that the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is 1 or less, the process proceeds to S2805. If it is determined that the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is not 1 or less, the process proceeds to S2809. In this case, as a determination criterion, a number of two or more may be applied as a threshold value. Further, after determining the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to proceed to the next step, and the process may proceed to the next step based on the determination result.

  In S2805, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory including information indicating the big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3 in the first start storage area 731. If it is determined that there is a start-up memory including information indicating the big win winning by the big hit symbol 3, the process proceeds to S2806. If it is determined that there is no start-up memory that includes information indicating the big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3, the process proceeds to S2809.

  In step S <b> 2806, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “01H” to the value of the jackpot end notification flag. As a result, during the execution of the round game in the big hit game state, the start memory is present in the first start memory area 731, and the start memory includes information indicating the big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3. The display mode related to the start memory is changed from a normal mode to a predetermined mode, and a notification message “DANGER” is displayed to indicate that it is difficult to shift to the probable gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Is done. If this process ends, the process moves to S2809.

  In step S <b> 2807, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is two or more. If it is determined that the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is two or more, the process proceeds to S2808. If it is determined that the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 is not two or more, the process proceeds to S2809. In this case, as a determination criterion, in consideration of the determination criterion of S2804, for example, a number of three or more may be applied as a threshold value. Further, after determining the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to proceed to the next step, and the process may proceed to the next step based on the determination result.

  In step S <b> 2808, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “00H” to the value of the big hit end notification flag. Accordingly, when the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area 372 becomes 2 or more, the display mode related to the start storage of the first start storage area 731 described above is changed, or a notification message “DANGER” is displayed. No notification is made. Even after such a notification is once performed, the value of the big hit end notification flag is maintained at “01H”, and the above notification is performed if a round game is being executed in the big hit gaming state. May be. In addition, even if the start memory existing in the first start storage area does not include information indicating the big win winning by the big hit symbol 3, for example, the information indicating the big hit winning by the big hit symbol 1 is included, The value of the big hit / end notification flag may be maintained at “01H” to perform the notification. In this case, although the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area is 2 or more, the player can feel uncomfortable by performing the notification as described above.

  In step S <b> 2809, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the corresponding effect data during the execution of the round game according to the value of the winning pattern flag. As a result, an effect image corresponding to the execution of the round game is displayed, and at that time, the display mode related to the start memory of the first start memory area 731 is changed, or a notification message “DANGER” is displayed. Is done. When this process ends, the processing routine at the time of opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 213, in S2900, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data corresponding to the end of hit according to the value of the hit pattern flag. Thereby, the effect image according to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S2901.

  In S2901, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S2902.

  In S2902, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the big hit end notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S2903.

  In S2903, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” to the value of the hit pattern flag. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Production mode control processing]
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an effect mode control process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode control process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 214, in S3000, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the information included in the gaming state command indicates a certain change based on the received gaming state command. If it is determined that the information included in the game state command indicates a certain change, the process proceeds to S3001. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information included in the game state command does not indicate a probability change, the process proceeds to S3003.

  In S3001, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “03H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, ST mode will be performed as presentation mode according to probability change and short-time game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S3002.

  In S3002, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the number of probability variation gaming states included in the gaming state command in the ST mode number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to “190” is set in the ST mode number counter. When this process ends, the effect mode control process routine ends.

  In S3003, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the information included in the gaming state command indicates a time reduction based on the received gaming state command. If it is determined that the information included in the game state command indicates time saving, the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information included in the game state command does not indicate time saving, the process proceeds to S3006.

  In S3004, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “02H” to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the time reduction mode is executed as the effect mode according to the uncertain change and the time reduction gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S3005.

  In S3005, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the number of short-time gaming states included in the gaming state command in the short-time mode number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to “100” or “30” is set in the time reduction mode number counter. When this process ends, the effect mode control process routine ends.

  In S3006, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the effect mode flag. Thereby, the normal mode is executed as the effect mode according to the non-probability change and the non-time-saving gaming state. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the first start storage memory content notification flag to “00H”. When this process is terminated, the effect mode control process routine is terminated.

[V winning notification process]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning notification process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 215, in S3100, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting V winning notification data. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the V winning notification data for notifying that the game state shifts to the probable gaming state after the big hit gaming state is detected when the V winning is detected by passing the game ball through the specific area 38A. To do. As a result, an effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and predetermined sound generation and light emission are performed using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. . If this process ends, the process moves to S3101.

  In S3101, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is finished, the V winning notification process routine is finished.

  As is clear from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B realize the first passage region and the second passage region through which the game medium can pass. ing. When the determination result that the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific game state (big hit game state) is obtained by the specific game state shift determination means, the main CPU 61 plays at least one of the first pass area and the second pass area. The first variable winning device (first grand prize opening 36) and the second variable winning device (second big prize port 37) are individually changed to the first mode and the second mode on condition that the medium has passed. A round game pattern determining means capable of determining a round game pattern (winning pattern) to be executed a plurality of times for the round game to be executed is realized. Further, the main CPU 61 realizes round game execution means for executing a round game a plurality of times based on the round game pattern determined by the round game pattern determination means in the specific game state.

  The main CPU 61 functioning as a round game pattern determining means includes a round game in which the first variable winning device changes into the first mode and the second mode on condition that the game medium has passed through the first passing area. The first round game pattern (the winning pattern 14) including the easy-to-pass round game that varies in the first mode and the second mode so that the second variable winning device can easily pass the game medium to the specific area can be determined. And the first variable winning device includes a round game that varies in the first mode and the second mode on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second passing region, and the second variable winning device is moved to the specific region. It is possible to determine a second round game pattern (a winning pattern 3) including a difficult-to-pass round game that varies in the first mode and the second mode so as to make it difficult for the game medium to pass. . The first round game pattern and the second round game pattern correspond to the second round game pattern rather than the total time in which the first variable prize device and the second variable prize device become the first mode according to the first round game pattern. The total time for the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device to be in the first mode is defined to be long.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 realizes an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect.

  Further, the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state has a ratio of the round gaming pattern determined by the round gaming pattern determining means in accordance with the passing area through which the game medium passes among the first passing area and the second passing area. It is determined by the round game pattern determining means regardless of the different first specific gaming state (big hit gaming state based on big hit symbol 2) and the passing area through which the game medium passes among the first passing area and the second passing area. And a second specific gaming state (a jackpot gaming state based on symbols other than jackpot symbol 2) having the same ratio of round gaming patterns. The sub CPU 71 functioning as an effect execution means has the first specific game state and the second specific game state in the effect mode from the transition to the specific game state until the game medium passes through the first pass area or the second pass area. It can be executed as a different production mode.

  In addition, the first start storage area of the main RAM 63 and the first start storage area 731 of the work RAM 73 are shifted to the specific game state on condition that the game medium has entered the first start area (first start port 32). The first storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not the second start storage area of the main RAM 63 and the second start storage area 732 of the work RAM 73 are second Second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to shift to the specific game state on condition that a game medium has entered the start area (second start port 33) Is realized. The first special symbol display unit 53 can perform a variable display of the first identification information based on the first start memory, on the first condition that the first start memory is stored in the first storage means. And a first identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode when the first start memory determines the transition to the specific gaming state. 2 The special symbol display unit 54 can perform a variable display of the second identification information based on the second start-up memory on the second condition that the second start-up memory is stored in the second storage means. In addition, the second identification information display means is provided that can stop-display the second identification information in a specific display mode when the second start-up memory determines the transition to the specific gaming state. In addition, the second condition is defined to have priority over the first condition, and the specific game state includes a special specific game state in which only the second round game pattern is determined, and includes the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal. In the special gaming state, the display device 4 realizes a notification unit that performs a predetermined notification when the first storage that determines the transition to the special specific gaming state is stored in the first storage unit.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 includes a first round game execution means capable of executing a first round game that causes the first variable prize device to change to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state, and a second game in the specific game state. A second round game executing means capable of executing a second round game for changing the variable winning device to the first mode and the second mode is realized. Further, the main CPU 61 determines that the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode after the specific game state is ended on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state. Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state (probability change game state) that is likely to be relatively, and after the specific game state ends on condition that the game medium does not pass through the specific area in the specific game state And a non-special gaming state control means capable of controlling the non-special gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state) in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is less likely to be relative to the specific display mode. ing. In addition, the main CPU 61 functioning as the second round game execution means, as the second round game, the easy-to-pass round game in which the game medium can easily pass through the specific area, and the game medium to relatively pass through the specific area. Difficult to pass round games can be executed. The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which at least a first round game and a difficult-to-pass round game are executed, and a second specific game state in which at least a first round game and an easy-to-pass round game are executed. Including. The main CPU 61 functioning as the specific gaming state control means has a relatively high probability when the first identification information is in a specific display mode than when the second identification information is in a specific display mode. While controlling to one specific gaming state, it is possible to control to the second specific gaming state with a relatively low probability. In the special gaming state, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as the notification unit store the first start memory for determining the first specific gaming state in the first storage unit, or store the first storage unit in the first storage unit. It is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that the first start memory for determining one specific gaming state is not stored.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as notification means can perform predetermined notification when the second start-up memory stored in the second storage means is less than a predetermined number. In addition, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as notification means store the first start memory for determining the first specific gaming state in the first storage means and are stored after the first start memory. In the case where there is the first start memory, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification on condition that the other first start memory does not determine the second specific gaming state.

  Further, the main CPU 61 realizes a specific gaming state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode, and the specific gaming state is ended. After that, the special game state control means capable of controlling the special game state in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is likely to be relative to the specific display mode is realized. The main CPU 61 functioning as a special gaming state control means has reached a predetermined number of times (the number of games in the probable gaming state (ST mode) is 190) after the end of the specific gaming state. On the condition that this is done, the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information can be controlled to a non-special game state in which it is difficult to be relative to the specific display mode. The sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as a notification means have a special number (probability game state (ST mode)) in which the first and second identification information are displayed in a variable number of times less than a predetermined number after the end of the specific game state. It is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that the number of remaining games reaches 10) and that the first start memory for determining the specific game state is stored in the first storage means.

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as notification means have reached the special number of variable display times of the first identification information and the second identification information after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special gaming state is stored in the first storage means. The predetermined notification is performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining the specific game state (first specific game state) is stored. In addition, the blade member 34 realizes a variable member that can be changed between an open mode in which a game medium can easily enter the second start area and a close mode in which the game medium cannot easily enter the second start area. The main CPU 61 realizes a special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state (time-short game state) in which the variable member is easily changed to the open mode after the specific game state is ended. When the main CPU 61 that functions as the special game state control means is controlled to the special game state after the end of the specific game state, the number of times of display of the first identification information and the second identification information is the specific number of times (the game in the short-time game state). It is possible to control the variable member to a non-special game state (non-short game state) in which the variable member is not easily changed to the open mode on the condition that it reaches several hundred times or thirty times. In addition, the main CPU 61 sets the first specific number of times (30) as the specific number of times on the condition that the specific game state is controlled by the specific game state control means and is controlled to the special game state after the end of the specific game state. And a specific number determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including a second specific number (100 times) greater than the first specific number. The main CPU 61 functioning as the specific number determining means determines the second specific number of times in the special gaming state rather than the non-special gaming state as the gaming state before being controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means. Probability is relatively high. The sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as a notification means stage have a special number (the number of remaining games in the short-time gaming state) in which the number of variable display times of the first identification information and the second identification information is less than the specific number after the specific gaming state ends. The predetermined notification is performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining the specific gaming state is stored in the first start memory.

[Screen display example]
Next, a screen display example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 216 and FIG. 217 are diagrams showing screen transitions from the normal mode through the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 to the ST mode or the time reduction mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  First, as shown in FIG. 216 (A), a plurality of decorative symbols 700 corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the first reserved number information 701 corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol and the second reserved number information 702 (see FIG. 220, etc.) corresponding to the start memory of the second special symbol are displayed. An information display area 710 indicating the type of effect mode is displayed. In FIG. 216 (A), “normal mode” is displayed in the information display area 710. As a result, it is recognized that the gaming state is a non-probability change and non-short-time gaming state corresponding to the normal mode. In FIG. 216 (A), four pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed, and three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as lost symbols. Further, none of the second reserved number information 702 is displayed. Thereby, as the next display state, it is recognized that the variation display of the decoration symbol 700 will be started together with the variation display of the special symbol using the start memory related to the first special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, three pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed by being deleted, and three decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner. Be started. At this time, if the start memory corresponding to the erased first reserved number information 701 includes information indicating the big win corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), the display area 4A On the screen, the left and right decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol, for example “1”, and the middle decorative symbol 700 is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the middle decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 2, for example, "111" Is displayed. In FIG. 216 (D), when one start memory is added in response to the start winning at the first start port 32, one first hold number information 701 is also added and displayed again four times. It is in the state.

  As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the line of “111”, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 is started and, as shown in FIG. 216 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays a message image 720 such as “big hit” indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. At this time, in the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, if either one of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B is selected and the game ball is passed preferentially, it corresponds to the desired hit pattern. Round games are easily executed. Therefore, the following screen is displayed in the display area 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, if left-handed is selected and the first pass gate 35A is preferentially passed, a so-called reaming can easily occur. If the selection instruction image 721 of “← Renso” indicating that this is true and the right-handed hitting is selected and the second pass gate 35B is preferentially passed, it is easy to obtain a large number of prize balls. A “→ blow” selection instruction image 722 and a message image 723 such as “Aim at any gate!” Are displayed. The selection instruction images 721 and 722 and the message image 723 are continuously displayed as long as the game ball does not pass through at least one of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B. The That is, even if the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 is started, the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened and closed while the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed. The round game to be started does not start.

  After the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A first, as shown in FIG. 217 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, In order to clarify the state, only the selection instruction image 721 of “← Renso” is displayed. When a predetermined time has passed after that, as shown in FIG. 217 (H), the display of the selection instruction image 721 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second big prize winning mouth are displayed. An image 730 such as “→ Right-handed” that prompts the user to aim at 37 by right-handed is displayed. Thereby, a round game is executed based on the winning pattern determined by the winning pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, since it is a big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 and the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A first, it is easy to execute a round game based on the hit pattern 14 (See the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) in FIG. 193). In this case, although the probability is low, the hit pattern 1 may be determined. When a round game is executed based on the winning pattern 1, a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (N) described later is displayed.

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 14, only the 1R and 11R eyes correspond to the actual round. As a result, in the round game based on the winning pattern 14, the number of prize balls is generally reduced, but basically, V winning in the specific area 38A is detected at the 1R or 11R eyes. Therefore, when a V prize is actually detected, an image 740 such as “V” indicating that a V prize has been detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 217 (I). . Thereby, it is notified that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is confirmed. The “V” image 740 indicating that the transition to the probability changing gaming state is confirmed is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. Note that when displaying a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (I), a screen as shown in FIG. 221 or 222 may be displayed, which will be described later.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 217 (J), a message image 741 such as “ST mode entry” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, 190 games are awarded as the number of games in the ST mode. However, if the V winning is not detected, even if the big hit gaming state is ended, the mode becomes the time reduction mode without shifting to the ST mode, so a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J ′) described later is displayed. It will be.

  When the ST mode is started, as shown in FIG. 217 (K), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode when the big hit gaming state starts, and the first reserved number information 701 is displayed. In addition, the information display area 710 displays that “ST mode” is displayed. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed.

  On the other hand, after the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, when the game ball passes through the second passing gate 35B first, as shown in FIG. 217 (G ′), the screen of the display area 4A. Only the selection instruction image 722 of “→ blow” is displayed on the top in order to clarify the state. After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 217 (H ′), the display of the selection instruction image 722 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second big prize winning are displayed. An image 730 such as “→ Right-handed” that prompts the user to aim the mouth 37 by right-handed is displayed. Thereby, a round game is executed based on the winning pattern determined by the winning pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, since it is a big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 and the game ball passes through the second passing gate 35B first, it is easy to execute a round game based on the hit pattern 3 (See the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) in FIG. 193). Even in this case, although the probability is low, the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 2 may be determined. For example, when a round game is executed based on the winning pattern 1, a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (N) described later is displayed. Further, when a round game is executed based on the winning pattern 2, for example, although not shown in the figure, a screen for transitioning to a challenge bonus may be displayed.

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1R and 11R rounds are not substantial rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th round, which are the remaining round numbers, correspond to substantial rounds. As a result, in a round game based on the winning pattern 3, it is difficult to detect V winning in the specific area 38A, but a large number of winning balls can be obtained as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 217 (I ′), it is very unlikely that an image such as “V” indicating that a V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In other words, it is mostly reported that it is impossible to shift to the probability variation gaming state.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 217 (J ′), a message image 742 such as “rushing to the short time mode” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, if the big hit symbol 2 is determined in the normal mode (non-short-time gaming state), 30 games are given as the number of games in the short-time mode. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 2 is determined in the ST mode or the short time mode (short time game state), 100 times are given as the number of games in the short time mode.

  When the time reduction mode is started, as shown in FIG. 217 (K ′), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode when the big hit gaming state is started, and the first reserved number information 701 and the like are displayed, and the information display area 710 indicates that the mode is the “short time mode”. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram showing screen transitions from the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 in the normal mode to the ST mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (L), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal mode, three decorative symbols 700 corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, for example, “777”. It may be displayed as a uniform line.

  As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the line “777”, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 is started. Although not particularly shown, “big hit” as shown in FIG. 216 (E). Is displayed, an “→ right strike” image 730 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to prompt a right strike as shown in FIG. 218 (M). In addition, at the start of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1, whether the game ball passes through either the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B is merely an opportunity for determining the winning pattern. It cannot be a factor related to the decision result. Therefore, for example, an image that encourages left-handed striking may be displayed, or an image indicating that either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B may be aimed at may be displayed. The displayed state of the displayed image 730 is continued unless the game ball passes through at least one of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B. That is, even if the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 is started, the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are opened and closed while the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (M) is displayed. The round game to be started does not start.

  When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B after the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (M) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 218 (N), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays an image 731 indicating the transition to the super big bonus.

  When a predetermined time has passed after that, as shown in FIG. 218 (O), the display of the image 731 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second big prize winning port 37 are displayed. An image 730 such as “→ Right-handed” that prompts the player to aim right-handed is displayed. After this image 730 is displayed, a round game is executed based on the winning pattern determined by the winning pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, since it is a big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 and the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B, the round game is executed based on the winning pattern 1. (See the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1) in FIG. 193).

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 1, the 1R and 11R rounds are substantial rounds, and the remaining round numbers 2R to 10R and 12R to 16R fall under the substantial rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the winning pattern 1, a large number of prize balls can be obtained as a whole, and V winning in the specific area 38A is basically detected at the 1R or 11R eyes. Therefore, when the V winning is actually detected, an image 740 such as “V” indicating that the V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 218 (P). . Thereby, it is notified that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is confirmed. The “V” image 740 indicating that the transition to the probability changing gaming state is confirmed is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. Note that when displaying a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (P), a screen as shown in FIG. 221 or 222 may be displayed, which will be described later.

  When the big hit gaming state ends, a message image 741 such as “ST mode entry” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, as shown in FIG. 218 (Q). However, if the V winning is not detected, even if the big hit gaming state is ended, the mode becomes the time reduction mode without shifting to the ST mode, so the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J ′) is displayed. In some cases. When the ST mode is started, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K) is displayed, although not particularly shown. On the other hand, in the time reduction mode, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K ′) is displayed.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing screen transitions from the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 in the normal mode to the transition to the time reduction mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (A), after the decorative display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal mode, three decorative symbols 700 corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, for example, “222”. It may be displayed as a uniform line.

  In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the “222” line, a big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started. Although not particularly shown, “big hit” as shown in FIG. 216 (E). As shown in FIG. 219 (B), a “→ right-handed” image 730 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to prompt the right-handed. In addition, even at the start of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, whether the game ball passes through either the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B is merely an opportunity for determining the winning pattern. It cannot be a factor related to the decision result alone. Therefore, for example, an image that encourages left-handed striking may be displayed, or an image indicating that either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B may be aimed at may be displayed.

  Even if the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B after the image 730 as shown in FIG. 219 (B) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), the display area 4A On this screen, the state where the image 730 is displayed is continued. That is, when the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B is played without notifying the type of the big hit game state as shown in FIG. 218 (N). If the ball passes, the round game based on the hit pattern 3 is started.

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1R and 11R rounds are not substantial rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th round, which are the remaining round numbers, correspond to substantial rounds. As a result, in a round game based on the winning pattern 3, it is difficult to detect V winning in the specific area 38A, but a large number of winning balls can be obtained as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game, “→ Right” prompts the player to aim at the first big winning port 36 and the second big winning port 37 by right-handing. Only the image 730 such as “hit” is displayed, and the image “V” indicating that the V winning is detected is hardly displayed. In other words, it is mostly reported that it is impossible to shift to the probability variation gaming state.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 219 (D), a message image 742 such as “rushing to the short time mode” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, if the big hit symbol 3 is determined in the normal mode (non-short-time gaming state), 30 times are given as the number of games in the short-time mode. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 2 is determined in the ST mode or the short time mode (short time gaming state) immediately before the transition to the normal mode, 100 times are given as the number of games in the short time mode. When the time reduction mode is started, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K ′) is displayed, although not particularly shown.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating screen transitions from the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 in the ST mode to the transition to the ST mode again as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (A), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the ST mode, three decorative symbols 700 corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, for example, “888”. It may be displayed as a uniform line. Since the ST mode is an effect mode corresponding to the short-time gaming state, the second hold number information 702 tends to be displayed together with the first hold number information 701. In addition, an image 730 that prompts the player to make a right turn is displayed in order to prompt a start winning at the second start port 33.

  As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the line of “888”, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started, and although not particularly shown, “big hit” as shown in FIG. 216 (E). 220 is displayed, an “→ right-handed” image 730 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to prompt a right-handed shot, as shown in FIG. 220 (B). In addition, even when the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started, whether the game ball passes through either the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B is merely an opportunity for determining the hit pattern. It cannot be a factor related to the decision result alone. Therefore, for example, an image that encourages left-handed striking may be displayed, or an image indicating that either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B may be aimed at may be displayed.

  Even if the game ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B after the image 730 as shown in FIG. 220 (B) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (C), the display area 4A On this screen, the state where the image 730 is displayed is continued. That is, when the big hit game state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started, the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B is played without notifying the type of the big hit game state as shown in FIG. 218 (N). If the ball passes, the round game based on any one of the winning patterns 1, 4 to 12 determined according to the big winning symbol 4 is started.

  In the round game based on the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12, at least the 1Rth is a substantial round, and includes a substantial round other than the 11Rth. As a result, in a round game based on the winning patterns 1, 4 to 12, a certain number of winning balls can be obtained, and a V winning in the specific area 38A is easily detected at least in the 1Rth. Therefore, when the V winning is actually detected, an image 740 such as “V” indicating that the V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 220 (C). . Thereby, it is notified that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is confirmed. The “V” image 740 indicating that the transition to the probability changing gaming state is confirmed is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. Note that when a screen as shown in FIG. 220C is displayed, a screen as shown in FIG. 221 or 222 described later may be displayed, which will be described later.

  When the big hit gaming state ends, a message image 741 such as “ST mode entry” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 220 (D). However, if the V winning is not detected, even if the big hit gaming state is ended, the mode becomes the time reduction mode without shifting to the ST mode, so the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J ′) is displayed. In some cases. When the ST mode is started, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K) is displayed, although not particularly shown. On the other hand, in the time reduction mode, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K ′) is displayed.

  FIG. 221 and FIG. 222 are diagrams showing screen transitions during big hits as screen display examples according to the second embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), during the round game, an image 730 that prompts the player to make a right-hand shot is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and “V” indicating that a V winning is detected. ”May be displayed.

  At this time, if there are, for example, four start memories of the first special symbol, but no start memories of the second special symbol, the screen of the display area 4A is displayed as shown in FIG. 221 (B). Above, four pieces of first reserved number information 701 are displayed according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and no second reserved number information 702 is displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol.

  When there is information including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the start memory of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 221 (C), a message image 750 of “DANGER” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221 (D), the display area 4A is replaced with the display of the message image 750 of “DANGER” and includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the first reserved number information 701. The specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of one special symbol is highlighted. The jackpot symbol 3 determines that the round game based on the hit pattern 3 is executed together with the jackpot winning. The winning pattern 3 is to execute the 1R and 11R eyes as a round game in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is not detected. That is, during the execution of the round game in which the V winning is confirmed, the start of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 (information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is won in the probability variation gaming state) If there is a memory, it is confirmed that the game will shift to the ST mode (probability changing gaming state) after the jackpot gaming state is finished according to the V prize, but soon the jackpot symbol 3 is associated with the starting memory. Based on this, there is a possibility that a big hit gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 3 may be entered, and even if the number of ST mode digested games is small, there is a possibility that the big hit gaming state will be entered immediately and then the mode will be shifted to the short time mode. . In order to notify such a state, a message image 750 of “DANGER” and specific first reserved number information 701A associated with the jackpot symbol 3 are displayed. In addition, when there is no start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, for example, a message image indicating the fact may be displayed to notify the user.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 221 (B ′), there are, for example, four start memories of the first special symbol and one or less start memories of the second special symbol. In this case, On the screen of the display area 4A, four pieces of first reserved number information 701 are displayed according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and second reserved number information 702 is displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol. For example, one is displayed.

  Even in such a case, when there is information including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the start memory of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 221 (C ′), the screen of the display area 4A is displayed. , “DANGER” message image 750 is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 221 (D ′), the display area 4 </ b> A includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the first reserved number information 701 instead of displaying the “DANGER” message image 750. The specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is highlighted. At this time, the second reserved number information 702 is displayed as it is without changing the display mode. That is, if the game is in the big hit game state after the V winning is confirmed and there is not more than one start memory for the second special symbol, the start memory for the first special symbol including information indicating the big hit symbol 3 In order to notify such a state, the message image 750 of “DANGER” and the specific first reserved number information 701A associated with the jackpot symbol 3 are displayed.

  On the other hand, there may be, for example, four start memories for the first special symbol and two or more start memories for the second special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 221 (B ″), on the screen of the display area 4A, four pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed according to the start memory of the first special symbol, and the second special number is displayed. For example, two pieces of second reserved number information 702 are displayed in accordance with the symbol start-up memory.

  In this way, even if the start memory of the first special symbol includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, two or more pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol. , The message image 750 “DANGER” is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 221 (C ″).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (D ″), on the screen of the display area 4A, the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the big hit symbol 3 is emphasized. In other words, even if there is a start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is confirmed, the second special symbol of the second special symbol is present. If there is a possibility of winning a big hit based on the start memory of the second special symbol due to the presence of two or more start memories, there is a high possibility that it will immediately shift to the short-time mode after shifting to the ST mode Since it is not a state, the message image 750 of “DANGER” and the specific first reserved number information 701A are not displayed. As described above, the condition for determining the number of start memories of the second special symbol is not limited to 1 or less and 2 or more. For example, 2 or less, 3 or more, 3 or less, and 4 or more. It is good also as such conditions.

  Similarly to the screen shown in FIG. 221 (A), as shown in FIG. 222 (A), the V prize is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A together with the image 730 for urging to the right during the execution of the round game. An “V” image 740 may be displayed.

  Similarly to the screen shown in FIG. 221 (B), if there are, for example, four start memories for the first special symbol, and no start memories for the second special symbol, FIG. 222 (B ), Four pieces of first hold number information 701 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in accordance with the start memory of the first special symbol, and second hold on the basis of the start memory of the second special symbol. No number information 702 is displayed.

  At this time, if there is no information including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the start memory of the first special symbol (information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is won in the probability variation gaming state), FIG. 222 (C) As shown in the figure, the message image 750 of “DANGER” is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (D), the specific first reserved number information 701A is not highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. That is, if the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 does not exist during execution of the round game in which the V winning is confirmed, the mode shifts to the short time mode immediately after the transition to the ST mode. Since there is no possibility, the “DANGER” message image 750 and the specific first reserved number information 701A are not displayed. In addition, even if there is a start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, the start memory stored after that is information indicating a jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol 3 (non-probability variable gaming state) If there is a start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to other than jackpot symbol 3 is won), as shown in FIGS. 222 (A) to 222 (D), “DANGER” The message image 750 and the specific first reserved number information 701A may not be displayed.

  223 to 225 are screen display examples according to the second embodiment, from the transition to the ST mode immediately after the end of the big hit, to the transition to the time reduction mode through the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 in the ST mode. It is a figure which shows a screen transition.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished and the mode is shifted to the ST mode, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, in a stop display mode (for example, “888”) when the big hit gaming state is started. The decorative symbol 700 is displayed, the first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 are displayed, and the information display area 710 displays that the “ST mode” is set. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed. At this time, it is assumed that four pieces of the first hold number information 701 are displayed and two pieces of the second hold number information 702 are displayed. The first reserved number information 701 includes specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start-up storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, but at this time, the second reserved number information 701A is included. Since two or more pieces of number information 702 are displayed, the specific first reserved number information 701A is not highlighted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from two to one by preferentially using the start memory of the second special symbol. Subtracted and displayed, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the second reserved number information 702 is 1 or less, specific first reserved number information 701A included in the first reserved number information 701 is highlighted. In the information display area 710, a message “DANGER” is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 223 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, one second reserved number information 702 is displayed in accordance with the start winning at the second start port 33 during the variable display of the decorative design 700. In some cases, the number is increased from two to two. In this case, since the second reserved number information 702 is two or more, the display mode in which the specific first reserved number information 701A is highlighted is changed to a normal display mode. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating that it is in the ST mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the second special symbol. Even at this time, the specific first reserved number information 701A is displayed in the normal display mode, and the information display area 710 displays that it is in the ST mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved symbol information 702 is reduced to one by displaying the start memory of the second special symbol preferentially. Then, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the second reserved number information 702 is 1 or less, the specific first reserved number information 701A included in the first reserved number information 701 is highlighted again. In addition, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating a “DANGER” message.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 becomes 0 by using the start memory of the second special symbol, and the three decorative symbols 700 are displayed. The change display of is started. Also in this case, since the second reserved number information 702 is 1 or less, the state in which the specific first reserved number information 701A included in the first reserved number information 701 is highlighted is maintained. The information display area 710 also maintains the display state indicating the “DANGER” message.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (I), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from four to three by using the start memory of the first special symbol. Then, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display of the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory is erased. The information display area 710 is also switched to the display state indicating the ST mode.

  Since the start memory corresponding to the erased specific first reserved number information 701A includes information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, the display area as shown in FIG. 224 (J) On the 4A screen, the left and right decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol, for example, “2”, and the middle decorative symbol 700 is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (K), on the screen of the display area 4A, the middle decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the jackpot symbol 3, for example, “222” assortment. Is displayed.

  As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the “222” line, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 224 (L), the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. Displays a message image 720 such as “big hit” indicating the start of the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (M), on the screen of the display area 4A, an image 730 prompting a right strike is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1R and 11R rounds are not substantial rounds, and the 2nd to 10th rounds and the 12th round, which are the remaining round numbers, correspond to substantial rounds. As a result, in a round game based on the winning pattern 3, it is difficult to detect V winning in the specific area 38A. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225 (M), an image 730 that prompts the player to make a right stroke is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game. "Is very unlikely to be displayed.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 225 (N), a message image 742 such as “rushing to the short time mode” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  When the time reduction mode is started, as shown in FIG. 225 (O), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in a stop display mode (for example, “222”) when the big hit gaming state is started. In addition to the display of the first hold number information 701 and the like, the information display area 710 displays that the “time saving mode”. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed.

  FIGS. 226 to 228 are diagrams showing screen transitions from the middle of the time-saving mode where the remaining number of times of the time-saving mode is, for example, 16 times or more to the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 as a screen display example according to the second embodiment. .

  As shown in FIG. 226 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decoration symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode of losing, and the first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 are displayed. In addition, it is assumed that “ST mode” is displayed in the information display area 710. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed. At this time, it is assumed that two pieces of the first hold number information 701 are displayed and two pieces of the second hold number information 702 are displayed. The first reserved number information 701 includes specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start-up storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, but at this time, the second reserved number information 701A is included. Since two or more pieces of number information 702 are displayed, the specific first reserved number information 701A is not highlighted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (B), on the screen of the display region 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from two to one by preferentially using the start memory of the second special symbol. Subtracted and displayed, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the second reserved number information 702 is 1 or less, specific first reserved number information 701A included in the first reserved number information 701 is highlighted. In addition, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating a “DANGER” message.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the second special symbol. At this time, the start memory of the first special symbol is added according to the start winning at the first start port 32, and the first reserved number information 701 is 2 so as to correspond to the start memory of the first special symbol for the additional portion. It is assumed that the number is increased from three to three. In addition, it is assumed that the start memory of the first special symbol added this time includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 or the jackpot symbol 2 corresponding to the winning pattern 1 or the like that is easy to win a V prize together with the big hit. That is, the first reserved number information 701 includes special first reserved number information 701B according to the start-up storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the big hit symbol 1 or the big hit symbol 2. In this case, the first hold number information 701 includes the specific first hold number information 701A, but includes special first hold number information 701B that can be digested later to become an advantageous jackpot gaming state. It becomes. At this time, the second reserved number information 702 is 1 or less, but since the first reserved number information 701 includes the special first reserved number information 701B as a priority condition, the screen of the display area 4A In the above, the display mode is changed from the highlighted first specific hold number information 701A to the normal display mode. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating that it is in the ST mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 becomes zero by using the start memory of the second special symbol, and the three decorative symbols 700 are displayed. The change display of is started. Also in this case, the second reserved number information 702 is 1 or less, but since the first reserved number information 701 includes special first reserved number information 701B as a priority condition, The state in which the first hold number information 701A is displayed in the normal display mode without being highlighted is maintained. The information display area 710 also maintains the display state indicating the ST mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the second special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from three to two by using the start memory of the first special symbol. Then, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display of the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory is erased.

  Since the start memory corresponding to the erased specific first reserved number information 701A includes information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, the display area as shown in FIG. 227 (G) On the screen of 4A, three decorative symbols 700 are displayed as, for example, “222” lines corresponding to jackpot symbol 3.

  As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the “222” line, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 227 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A. Displays a message image 720 of “big hit” indicating the start of the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227 (I), an image 730 that prompts the player to make a right strike is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the winning pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V winning in the specific area 38A. Therefore, there is a possibility that an image such as “V” indicating that a V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game only by displaying the image 730 prompting a right strike. Very low.

  When the big hit gaming state is completed, as shown in FIG. 227 (J), a message image 742 such as “rushing to the short time mode” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  When the time reduction mode is started, as shown in FIG. 227 (K), on the screen of the display area 4A, a stop display mode (for example, “222”) at the time when the big hit gaming state is started as in FIG. 227 (G). The decorative symbol 700 is displayed, the first reserved number information 701 and the like are displayed, and the information display area 710 displays that the “short time mode” is selected. In addition, an image 730 prompting a right strike is also displayed. At this time, the first hold number information 701 includes special first hold number information 701B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (L), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from two to one by using the start memory of the first special symbol, Variation display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, the first hold number information 701 includes special first hold number information 701B. In addition, the information display area 710 maintains a display state indicating the time reduction mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 228 (M), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the first special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (N), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from 1 to 0 by using the start memory of the first special symbol, Variation display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, for example, since the start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 is applied, the display of the special first reserved number information 701B corresponding to the start memory is erased.

  Since the start memory corresponding to the erased special first reserved number information 701B includes information indicating the jackpot winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1, the display area is displayed as shown in FIG. 228 (O). On the 4A screen, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as, for example, “777” lines corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1. As a result, the short-time mode ends and the big hit gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 1 starts. If a V win is won, the game generally shifts to the ST mode after the big hit gaming state ends.

  FIG. 229 and FIG. 230 are diagrams showing screen transitions from the time-saving mode to the jackpot corresponding to jackpot symbol 3 to the time-saving mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows performing a predetermined | prescribed effect according to whether the information which shows the big hit is contained in the 1st starting memory | storage.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative design 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing, and the first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 are displayed. In addition, it is assumed that “information mode” is displayed in the information display area 710. Further, four pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed, and four pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are also displayed. The first held number information 701 includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3. It is assumed that specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since two or more pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are displayed, the specific first held number information 701A is not highlighted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from four to three by preferentially using the start memory of the second special symbol. Subtracted and displayed, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, if the remaining number of time-saving modes is 15 times, information such as “15 times of time-saving mode remaining” is displayed in the information display area 710. Then, the specific first reserved number information 701A included in the first reserved number information 701 is changed from the normal display mode to the highlighted display mode. As described above, when the remaining number of times in the time reduction mode is 15 or less, the condition that the specific first reserved number information 701A is not highlighted when there are two or more second reserved number information 702 in the above-described ST mode. Is applied as a priority condition, and the specific first reserved number information 701A is highlighted. However, the “DANGER” message is not displayed in the information display area 710.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 229 (C) and 229 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the second special symbol. At this time, the information display area 710 displays that the mode is the time reduction mode.

  After that, although not shown in particular, in the state where the remaining number of times in the time reduction mode is 15 times or less, based on the start memory of the second special symbol, the decorative display 700 and the stop display which becomes the stop display mode of the loss are repeatedly performed. Accordingly, when the second reserved number information 702 is sequentially reduced to 0, the decorative symbol 700 is displayed in a variable manner based on the start memory of the first special symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the loss based on the start memory of the first special symbol. At this time, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from four to three by using the start memory of the first special symbol, and the first reserved number information 701 used in the next order is a specific first The reserved number information 701A is highlighted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from three to two by using the start memory of the first special symbol. The variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display of the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory is erased.

  Since the start memory corresponding to the erased specific first reserved number information 701A includes information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3, as shown in FIGS. 230 (G) and (H). In addition, on the screen of the display area 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as, for example, “222” lines corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3.

  In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the “222” line, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 230 (I), the display area 4A is displayed on the screen. Displays a message image 720 of “big hit” indicating the start of the big hit gaming state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (J), an image 730 prompting a right strike is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the winning pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V winning in the specific area 38A. Therefore, there is a possibility that an image such as “V” indicating that a V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the execution of the round game only by displaying the image 730 prompting a right strike. Very low.

  When the big hit gaming state is finished, as shown in FIG. 230 (K), a message image 742 such as “rushing to the short time mode” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, since the big hit symbol 3 has been determined in the time-saving mode (time-saving gaming state), the number of games in the time-saving mode is given 100 times.

  FIG. 231 and FIG. 232 are diagrams showing screen transitions from the time reduction mode reaching the predetermined remaining number of times to the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 as a modified example of the second embodiment, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing that a predetermined effect is performed depending on whether or not the information indicating the big hit is included in the first start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, three decorative symbols 700 are variably displayed based on the start memory of the second special symbol, and the information display region 710 displays “ Information such as “short time mode remaining 15 times” is displayed. Further, three pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed, and two pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are displayed. The first held number information 701 includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3. It is assumed that specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode is 15, the specific first reserved number information 701A is highlighted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 231 (B) and (C), after the decorative symbol 700 is displayed in a variable manner based on the start memory of the second special symbol on the screen of the display area 4A, Stopped display. At this time, the start memory of the second special symbol is added according to the start winning at the second start port 33, and the second reserved number information 702 is 2 so as to correspond to the start memory of the additional second special symbol. The number is increased from three to three. Further, it is assumed that the start memory of the second special symbol added this time includes information indicating, for example, the big hit symbol 4 corresponding to the winning pattern that is easy to win the V prize together with the big hit. In other words, the second reserved number information 702 includes special second reserved number information 702A corresponding to the start-up storage of the second special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 4. In this case, the first reserved number information 701 includes specific first reserved number information 701A, but includes special second reserved number information 702A that can be digested earlier to become an advantageous big hit gaming state. It will be. At this time, the remaining number of time-saving modes is 15 or less, but the addition of the special second reserved number information 702A is applied as a priority condition, and on the screen of the display area 4A, a specific The display mode in which the first reserved number information 701A is highlighted is changed to the normal display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 231 (D) and (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decoration is based on the start-up memory of the second special symbol in a state where the remaining number of time reduction modes is 15 times or less. The change display of the symbol 700 and the stop display that is the stop display mode of the loss are performed, and accordingly, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced to two.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 232 (F) and 232 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 and the stop display mode of the loss are again performed based on the start memory of the second special symbol. Stop display is performed, and accordingly, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced to one. The second reserved number information 702 corresponds to special second reserved number information 702A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (H), the second reserved number information 702 is reduced from 1 to 0 by using the start memory of the second special symbol on the screen of the display area 4A. Variation display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start memory of the second special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 4 is applied, the display of the special second reserved number information 702A corresponding to the start memory is erased.

  Since the start memory corresponding to the erased special second reserved number information 702A includes information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the big hit symbol 4, as shown in FIGS. 230 (I) and (J). In addition, on the screen of the display area 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as, for example, “888” lines corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3. As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the line “888”, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started. As described above, when the special second reserved number information 702A corresponding to the jackpot symbol 4 is first digested and the big hit gaming state is started, the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 is emphasized. It can be prevented from being displayed.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram showing screen transitions until the ST mode reaches a predetermined remaining number as a screen display example according to the second embodiment, and information indicating a big hit is included in the first start memory in the probability variation gaming state. It is a figure which shows performing a predetermined | prescribed effect according to whether it is.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative design 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing, and the first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 are displayed. In addition, it is assumed that “ST mode” is displayed in the information display area 710. Further, four pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed, and four pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are also displayed. The first held number information 701 includes information indicating the jackpot symbol 3. It is assumed that specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since two or more pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are displayed, the specific first held number information 701A is not highlighted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from four to three by preferentially using the start memory of the second special symbol. Subtracted and displayed, the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, if the remaining number of times in the ST mode is 10, information such as “ST mode remaining 10 times” indicating that is displayed in the information display area 710. Then, the specific first reserved number information 701A included in the first reserved number information 701 is changed from the normal display mode to the highlighted display mode. As described above, even when the remaining number of times in the ST mode is 10 or less, the specific first reserved number information 701A is not highlighted if there is two or more second reserved number information 702 in the above-described ST mode. Is applied as a priority condition, and the specific first reserved number information 701A is highlighted.

[Effects of gaming machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  In such a configuration, there is a difference between the winning pattern 14 and the winning pattern 3 in the ease of accepting a game ball by the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37. That is, in the winning pattern 14, although the total number of acceptances is relatively reduced from the total time when the round game is opened, the second grand prize opening 37 continues to be opened for a predetermined time at the 1R and 11R. As a result, a round game that easily passes through the specific area 38A is executed, thereby making it easier to shift to the probability-changing game state. On the other hand, in the winning pattern 3, the time during which the second grand prize winning opening 37 is in the open state at the 1R and 11R is relatively shortened, so that the round game that does not easily pass through the specific area 38A is executed. Although it is difficult to shift to the gaming state, the total number of acceptance is relatively larger than the winning pattern 14 from the total time in which all round games are opened. Therefore, according to such a configuration, when shifting to the big hit gaming state, the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 14 are generally determined depending on which of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B the gaming ball is preferentially passed. Since the big hit gaming state corresponding to one of the winning patterns 3 can be selected, it is possible to realize the technical intervention that allows the player to select whether or not to shift to the probability changing gaming state. Then, in selecting the big hit gaming state corresponding to the winning pattern 14 or the winning pattern 3 by preferential passage of the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B, the big hit gaming state corresponding to any winning pattern is selected. Even so, since a game profit and a disadvantage are generated, it is possible to appropriately maintain a balance between the profit and the disadvantage received by the player and the gaming machine store.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, the contents of the effect are produced when the control of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit symbol 2 is started and when the control of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol 2 is started. Therefore, the player has a situation where the determination rate of the hit pattern is different depending on the passage of either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B as to whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state. It can be distinguished from the situation in which the determination ratio of the hit pattern is the same by any passage of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B, and the game is performed with respect to the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B. Before passing the ball, it is possible to clearly identify the situation that can be selected as to whether or not to shift to the probable gaming state and the situation that such a selection cannot be made. That. For example, when the control of the big hit gaming state is started based on the big hit symbol 2 and it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the special gaming state accordingly, the big hit game with the contents explicitly indicating that fact By executing the effect according to the state (see FIG. 217 (F)), the player can surely recognize such a selectable situation, and the desired first passing gate 35A or the second one. A game can be played so that the game ball passes through the passing gate 35B.

  Further, according to such a configuration, in the probability variation gaming state, the information indicating the big hit symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 and the determination result indicating the transition to the big hit gaming state is stored in association with the first start memory. In other words, if the transition to the jackpot gaming state is confirmed, but it is difficult to transition to the probability change gaming state again after the transition to the jackpot gaming state, information corresponding to that is stored Is notified (see FIGS. 223 and 224). The player who has received such notification can quickly detect that it is difficult to shift to the probability-changing gaming state again in the probability-changing gaming state. A player who has detected such a situation, for example, performs a game so that priority is given to the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the second start memory as much as possible. Can be avoided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 222, when it is notified that the information indicating the big hit symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 that is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state is not stored, the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. Since it is not necessary to prioritize the game, the game can be interrupted with a sense of security. In this way, since the way of proceeding the game changes according to the notified content, the monotony of the game can be eliminated.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 223 and 224, when the second start memory becomes less than two, for example, the determination result that the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state that is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state. It is notified that the first start memory indicating is stored. In other words, when there are two or more second start memories and the change display and the stop display of the second special symbol are preferentially performed, whether or not such first start memories are stored is determined. In particular, no notification will be given. As a result, when there is a certain number of second start memories, and there is no disadvantageous situation for the player even if the above notification is not given, it gives a sense of security that the probability variation gaming state will not be interrupted for a while. The game can be advanced while.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, the first start memory indicating the determination result indicating the transition to the jackpot gaming state that is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state is stored, and further stored after that. If there is another first start memory that has been set and the other first start memory does not indicate a determination result indicating the transition to the big hit gaming state that is likely to shift to the probability variation gaming state, the transition to the probability variation gaming state is made. It is notified that the first start memory indicating that it is difficult to store is stored. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 226 to 228, even if the first start memory indicating that it is difficult to shift to the probability-changing gaming state is stored, it is possible to change to the probability-changing gaming state after that. When the first start memory is stored, the first start memory to be digested first is not particularly notified. In other words, after the big hit gaming state is finished, it is temporarily shifted to the non-probability changing gaming state, but after that, based on the other first start memory, the big hit gaming state is easily changed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability changing gaming state is easily changed. If this is confirmed, the notification as described above is not performed, so that unnecessary notification can be prevented from being performed excessively, and useful information can be appropriately notified depending on the situation. And by extension, the game can proceed with peace of mind.

  Also, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 233, after the big hit gaming state, in the probability variation gaming state, the special symbol variation display count is a special number (the number of times that the probability variation gaming state remains 10 times). If the first start memory for determining the big hit symbol 3 of the winning pattern 3 that is difficult to shift to the probability changing gaming state is stored when the remaining number is reduced to some extent until the predetermined number of times (190 times) at which the probability changing gaming state ends by reaching Since this is notified, significant notification that contributes to the player's profit can be performed as notification of contents indicating whether or not to shift to the probability-changing gaming state again in the probability-changing gaming state. That is, since the first start memory is not preferentially digested over the second start memory, unless the predetermined notification is made, the first special symbol based on the first start memory is not displayed until the end of the probability change gaming state. There is a fear. In addition, since the object to be notified is the first start memory that determines the big hit symbol 3, when the variation display based on the first start memory is performed, the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state. In short, the first start memory may determine the big hit gaming state in the probability variable gaming state based on the information indicating the random number for hit determination, but does not determine the big hit gaming state in the non-probable variable gaming state. Since there is a possibility, there may be a disadvantage for the player without shifting to the big hit gaming state. In order to deal with such a case, by performing the predetermined notification as described above, it is possible to prompt a change display based on the first start memory that is not preferentially digested, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged. can do. In other words, the profit related to the probability variation gaming state is lost, but the loss of profit such as the big hit gaming state can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, after the big hit gaming state is finished, even in the short-time gaming state, the special symbol variation display number is the special number (the short-time gaming state is the remaining 15 times). 1) to determine the big hit symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 that is difficult to shift to the probable gaming state, for example, when the remaining number decreases to a certain number (100 times or 30 times) at which the short-time gaming state ends. If the start-up memory is stored, this is notified, so that significant notification that contributes to the player's profit can be performed even in the short-time gaming state. In other words, since the time-saving gaming state is more likely to be given the number of time-savings than the non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to obtain further benefits relating to the time-saving gaming state by performing a predetermined notification.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment, which is partially different from the second embodiment described above, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, only one passing gate 35A is provided as a passing gate, and the player selects a hit pattern according to the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A. It is configured as follows. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, only the big hit symbol 2 is determined as the big hit symbol, and either the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 14 is determined as the hit pattern.

[Game flow of gaming machine according to the third embodiment]
FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing a game flow of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Note that the flowchart in the figure shows the main flow of the entire game, and does not distinguish between the processing by the main CPU 61 and the processing by the sub CPU 71. For this reason, the execution subject of each process is simply described as a CPU.

  As shown in FIG. 234, in S4000, the CPU determines whether there is a start memory. If it is determined that there is a start memory, the CPU moves the process to S4001. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no start memory, the CPU repeatedly executes the process of S4000 until it is determined that there is start memory.

  In S4001, the CPU executes jackpot determination processing based on the probability according to the gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S4002.

  In S4002, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the CPU determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S4004. On the other hand, if the CPU determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S4003.

  In S4003, the CPU changes the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a process of stopping and displaying the lost symbol. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4000 again.

  In S4004, the CPU performs a process of stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol after the special symbol is changed for a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol 2 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4005.

  In S4005, after starting the control of the big hit gaming state, the CPU performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the hit pattern determining timer. The hit pattern determination timer is a timer for measuring a plurality of times (periods) defined in advance until the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A. As the predetermined value, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the first period. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4006.

  In S4006, the CPU performs processing for setting hit pattern determination data. In the present embodiment, data for determining the hit pattern 14 is set as the hit pattern determining data corresponding to the first period. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4007.

  In S4007, the CPU performs processing for setting notification data corresponding to the hit pattern determination data. That is, in the present embodiment, notification data for notifying that the winning pattern 14 is executed when the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A within the time of the first period is set. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4008.

  In S4008, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the passing of the game ball at the passing gate 35A is detected based on the detection signal from the passing gate switch. In this process, if the CPU determines that the passing of the game ball at the passing gate 35A is detected, the CPU moves to S4009, and if the CPU determines that the passing of the gaming ball at the passing gate 35A is not detected, the process proceeds to S4010. Move processing to.

  In S4009, the CPU performs a process of determining a hit pattern based on the hit pattern determination data. For example, when the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the first period is set, the hit pattern 14 is determined. On the other hand, hit pattern determination data corresponding to a second period to be described later may be set. In this case, the hit pattern 3 is determined. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4015.

  In S4010, the CPU performs a subtraction process for the hit pattern determination timer. For example, when “3000” is set as a predetermined value corresponding to 6 seconds in the hit pattern determination timer in the process of S4005, this process is executed to subtract 1 every 2 ms. Thereby, a period corresponding to 6 seconds is measured. Thereafter, the CPU shifts the processing to S4011.

  In S4011, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the hit pattern determination timer is “0”. In this process, if the CPU determines that the value of the hit pattern determination timer is “0”, the CPU moves to S4012 and determines that the value of the hit pattern determination timer is not “0”. Returns the process to S4008.

  In S4012, the CPU performs again the process of setting a predetermined value in the hit pattern determination timer. In S4012, as the predetermined value, if the first period has elapsed, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the second period. On the other hand, if the second period has elapsed, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the first period. In the present embodiment, the first period and the second period are both the same time (6 seconds), but may be different times. For example, the first period corresponding to the hit pattern 14 may be a relatively long time, and the second period corresponding to the hit pattern 3 described later may be a relatively short time. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4013.

  In S4013, the CPU performs a process of changing the hit pattern determination data. In this process, if the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the hit pattern 14 is currently set, the CPU changes to the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the hit pattern 3, and corresponds to the hit pattern 3 at the present time. If the hit pattern determining data is set, the hit pattern determining data corresponding to the hit pattern 14 is changed. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4014.

  In S4014, the CPU performs a process of setting notification data corresponding to the changed hit pattern determination data. That is, in the present embodiment, when the first period has elapsed, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 3 is executed by passing the game ball through the passing gate 35A within the time of the second period is set. The In addition, when the second period has elapsed, notification data for notifying that the winning pattern 14 is executed by passing the game ball through the passing gate 35A again within the time of the first period is set. According to such notification data, before passing the game ball to the passage gate 35A, the corresponding hit pattern 3 or hit pattern 14 corresponding to the first period or the second period is executed when it passes at the present time. To be informed. Also, until the game ball passes through the passing gate 35A, the first period and the second period are sequentially switched, and each time the first period and the second period elapse, the hit pattern 3 and the hit pattern 14 and related data are changed. Prepared alternately. Thereafter, the CPU returns the process to S4008.

  In S4015, the CPU performs control to open and close the big winning opening based on the winning pattern in order to execute the round game in the big winning game state. Thereafter, the CPU moves the process to S4016.

  In S4016, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the final round game has ended. In this process, if the CPU determines that the final round game has ended, it moves the process to S4017, and if it determines that the final round game has not ended, it returns the process to S4015.

  In S4017, the CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A (V winning). In this process, if the CPU determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A, the process proceeds to S4018. If the CPU determines that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 38A, the first S4000 is processed. Return processing to.

  In S4018, the CPU performs a process of controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state to the probability changing gaming state. When the game ball has not passed through the specific area 38A, the process returns to the first S4000, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled as the non-probability changing gaming state.

  Thereby, the CPU (main CPU 61) in the present embodiment has at least the first period and the second period as a plurality of periods when the determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination unit shifts to the specific game state is obtained. The period setting means which can set is realized. In addition, the CPU (main CPU 61) functioning as the round game pattern determining means has the first variable winning device (first CPU) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area 38A in the first period set by the period setting means. The grand prize opening 36) includes round games that vary in the first mode and the second mode, and the two variable prize-winning device (second big prize port 37) facilitates the passage of game media to a specific area. A first round game pattern (a winning pattern 14) including an easy-to-pass round game that varies in one mode and a second mode can be determined, and the game medium passes through the passing area 38A in the second period set by the period setting means. On the condition that the first variable winning device includes a round game that varies in the first mode and the second mode, the second variable winning device allows the game medium to pass to the specific area. Second round game pattern (per pattern 3) comprising a passage difficulties round game that varies the first and second aspects as a flame can be determined.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to such a configuration, when shifting to the big hit gaming state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the passage gate 35A within the time period of the first period, or the game ball is allowed to pass within the time period of the second period. Therefore, the big hit gaming state corresponding to one of the winning pattern 14 and the winning pattern 3 can be selected, so that the technical intervention that can allow the player to select whether or not to shift to the probability changing gaming state is realized. be able to. Then, by selecting the big hit gaming state corresponding to the winning pattern 14 or the winning pattern 3 by passing the passing gate 35A within the time of either the first period or the second period, it corresponds to any winning pattern. Even if the big hit gaming state is selected, a profit and a disadvantage on the game are generated, so that the balance between the profit and the disadvantage received by the player and the gaming machine installation store can be appropriately maintained.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment.

  For example, you may make it determine a production mode and a decoration symbol according to the kind of jackpot symbol as follows. When the decorative design is set to “7” and the golden design is used, the super big bonus is determined. In addition, when the decorative symbol is “3” and red symbol is used, the success of the challenge bonus is confirmed on the condition that the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, and the second special symbol is a big hit symbol. A special effect mode prescribed in advance is executed, and the execution of substantially 15R is confirmed. In addition, when the decorative symbols are set to “1” or “5” and the pink symbols are used, the success probability of the challenge bonus is relatively high on the condition that the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, and the second special symbol is used. On the condition that the symbol is a big hit symbol, it is assumed that the bonus is more advantageous than the blue symbol described later (substantially more than 8R is determined or the possibility of executing the actual 4R is relatively low). If the decorative symbol is “2”, “4”, or “6”, and the blue symbol is set, the success probability of the challenge bonus should be relatively low on the condition that the first special symbol is a big hit symbol Or it is set to 0, and it is set as a bonus which is more disadvantageous than the pink symbol on the condition that the second special symbol is a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the various effect patterns executed in the big hit gaming state may be selected from those specified in advance according to the type of the big hit gaming state and may not be determined for each round game.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the effect patterns in the challenge bonus and the extra bonus, the effect pattern of each round game is determined each time on the condition of shifting to the big hit gaming state, but from all the effect patterns defined in advance. By selecting one effect pattern, all effect patterns executed in the challenge bonus and the extra bonus may be determined in one determination process.

  In the above-described embodiment, the challenge bonus determines the production contents based on the three types of production patterns, refers only to the production contents of the production pattern selected by the player, and produces the production contents of the other production patterns. Although the contents are discarded, the contents of effects corresponding only to the effect pattern selected by the player may be determined.

  Prior to the start of the big hit gaming state related to the challenge bonus, three types of effect patterns in the challenge bonus may be determined and the player may select an effect pattern. In this case, the icon display and the execution of the round game with easy V winning can be notified in advance before the start of the challenge bonus.

  In the extra bonus, the display mode of numerical values such as the number of paid-out winning balls and the total number of winning balls may be different from that of the above-described embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the number of winnings with respect to the big prize opening is one and the numerical value displayed on the blue meter is “10”. However, the numerical value displayed per additional winning number is “1”, for example. It is good also as. Further, addition may be expressed by changing the color according to the number of winnings. Specifically, white is displayed when the number of winnings is “0”, blue is displayed when the number of winnings is “10”, and blue is displayed when the number of winnings is “50”. There is an expression method. Such an expression method of addition by color change can be similarly applied to a red meter.

  In addition, in the case of the extra bonus, even when the upper limit winning number is exceeded, the numerical value corresponding to the surplus may be reflected in the number of payout balls displayed on the blue meter. For example, when “11” gaming balls exceeding the upper limit winning number are won in the big winning opening, the number of payout winning balls is “110” after adding the number of winning balls “10” corresponding to the winning of one gaming ball. "May be added and displayed. However, when such a blue meter addition display is performed, the red meter also displays a numerical value corresponding to the amount exceeding the maximum number of winnings, so that the blue meter and the red meter can be used in subsequent round games. It is preferable that no contradiction arises in the display content.

  In the second embodiment described above, the first pass gate 35A and the second pass gate 35B related to the normal symbol lottery are started to control the big hit gaming state, or the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) is selected by the player. Although it was also used as a device for making it happen, such a device may be provided separately from the passing gate related to the normal symbol lottery.

  In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability change gaming state is determined according to whether or not the specific area 30A is a V prize. The same configuration as that of the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine configured to determine whether to shift to the gaming state by lottery in the same manner as the big win. In addition, as shown in FIG. 186, a configuration similar to that of the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine provided with only one big winning opening. At this time, hit patterns 1 to 13 shown in FIG. 187 are applied as hit patterns 1 to 13 in FIG. 191 so as to correspond to one big winning opening, and the hit pattern 14 in FIG. In this case, a hit pattern in which the 11Rth becomes the opening / closing pattern A may be applied. In this case, for example, the 1R round game that becomes the opening / closing pattern B while the displacement member operates is executed as an easy-to-pass round game, and other round games (including the 11R round game that becomes the opening / closing pattern A). Is executed as a difficult-to-pass round game when the displacement member becomes inoperative. That is, if the displacing member is operated and the winning pattern has an opening time (opening mode) that is easy to win a V, the winning game round game becomes an easy passing round game. Therefore, the round game of the hit patterns A, D, and E can be an easy-to-pass round game on condition that the displacement member is operated.

  In the second embodiment, the ST count (190 times) is larger than the short time count (100 times or 30 times). For example, after setting the short time count to 100 times or 30 times, It may be set to 5 times so that the number of time reductions is larger than the number of STs. In addition, as the number of time savings, for example, 0 times may be determined, and there may be a case where the time saving gaming state is not shifted to after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than 0% in the non-time-saving gaming state.

As a modification of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, the big hit symbols 1 to 4 and the hit patterns 1 to 12 and 14 may be associated with each other. In this case, the following can be performed as an example.
(Big jackpot 1)
The hit pattern 1 is always determined with a probability of 100% without switching between the first period and the second period.
-During the big hit gaming state, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 1) is notified until the hit pattern is determined.
(Big jackpot 2)
For example, the period in which the hit pattern 1 can be selected is 0.03 seconds as a period, the time in which the hit pattern 2 can be selected is b period, for example 0.03 seconds, and the time in which the hit pattern 3 can be selected is c period. The time during which the winning pattern 14 can be selected is 0.22 seconds, for example, 0.22 seconds as the d period. A state in which the a period, the b period, the c period, and the d period elapse are set as one set, and a period in which 10 sets are performed is an A period (5 seconds). During this period A, the type of the winning pattern is not notified during the big hit gaming state (not notified).
As a period to be switched next to the A period, a B period (5 seconds) in which only the hit pattern 3 can be selected is provided. The period B corresponds to the second period in the third embodiment. In this period B, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 3) is notified.
As a period to be switched next to the B period, a C period (5 seconds) in which only the hit pattern 14 can be selected is provided. The period C corresponds to the first period in the third embodiment. Also in the period C, the type of the hit pattern (the hit pattern 14) is notified.
-By switching in order of the A period, the B period, and the C period, a period in which notification is performed and a period in which the notification is not performed are provided.
(Big jackpot 3)
The hit pattern 3 is always determined with a probability of 100% without switching between the first period and the second period.
-During the big hit gaming state, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 3) is notified until the hit pattern is determined.
(Big hit 4)
The time in which the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 can be sequentially selected is switched every 0.02 seconds, for example, and during this time, the type of the hit pattern is not notified during the big hit gaming state (not notified).

  If there are many hit patterns as in the modification of the third embodiment described above, the type of hit pattern may not be notified in any period.

  In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the techniques in the other embodiments can be applied to each other as long as the characteristic configuration and the essential effect are not inhibited.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device (notification means, display means, production execution means)
32 1st start opening (1st start area)
33 Second start port (second start area)
34 Blade member (variable member)
35A First pass gate (first pass area)
35B second passage gate (second passage region)
36 1st Grand Prize Winner (First Variable Prize Winner)
36A First big prize opening shutter (first variable prize winning device)
37 2nd Grand Prize Winner (2nd variable prize device)
37 Second grand prize opening shutter (second variable prize-winning device)
38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39, 39 'Displacement member 53 First special symbol display section (first identification information display means)
54 Second special symbol display section (second identification information display means)
61 Main CPU (special gaming state transition determination means, specific gaming state control means, special gaming state control means, non-special gaming state control means, first round gaming execution means, second round gaming execution means, first specific gaming state transition Determination means, second specific game state transition determination means, round game pattern determination means, round game execution means, special game state control means, non-special game state control means, specific number of times determination means, period setting means)
63 Main RAM (first storage means, second storage means)
71 Sub CPU (notification means, display control means, prior notification means, scheduled amount determination means, notification quantity change means, effect execution means)
73 Work RAM (storage means, first storage means, second storage means)
83 Dispensing device (game value giving means)

Claims (4)

A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A first start area provided in the game area and into which a game medium can enter;
First storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not to enter a specific game state advantageous to the player on condition that a game medium has entered the first start area When,
Based on the first condition that the first start memory is stored in the first storage means, the first identification information can be displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory. First identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode when the memory determines the specific gaming state;
A second start area provided in the game area and into which a game medium can enter;
Second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to enter the specific gaming state on condition that a game medium has entered the second start area;
Based on the second condition that the second start-up memory is stored in the second storage means, the second identification information can be displayed in a variable manner based on the second start-up memory. A second identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode when the memory determines the specific gaming state;
Specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode;
A special gaming state control means capable of controlling a special gaming state in which a stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is likely to be relatively relative to a specific display mode after the specific gaming state ends;
An informing means capable of informing predetermined information;
A gaming machine equipped with
The second condition has priority over the first condition,
The special gaming state control means may be configured to provide the first identification information or the second identification condition on condition that the first and second identification information and the second identification information have reached a predetermined number of times after the specific gaming state ends. The stop display mode of the identification information can be controlled to a non-special game state that is difficult to be relative to a specific display mode,
The notifying means has reached a special number in which the number of variable displays of the first identification information and the second identification information after the end of the specific gaming state is less than the predetermined number of times, and stores the special gaming state in the first storage means A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined notification can be made on condition that a first start memory for determining the specific gaming state is stored. A first variable winning device that is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to receive
A second variable winning device that is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be received;
First round game execution means capable of executing a first round game in which the first variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state;
Second round game execution means capable of executing a second round game in which the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state;
The second round game execution means, as the second round game,
An easy-to-pass round game in which the game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area;
A difficult-to-pass round game in which a game medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area;
Is possible and
The specific gaming state is
A first specific game state in which at least the first round game and the difficult-to-pass round game are executed;
A second specific gaming state in which at least the first round game and the easy-to-pass round game are executed;
The notifying means has reached the special number of times that the first identification information and the second identification information have been changed after the end of the specific gaming state, and the first storage means stores the first specific information in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined notification is performed on condition that a first start memory for determining a gaming state is stored. A variable winning device provided in the game area, which can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is difficult to be received;
In the specific game state, a round game capable of executing an easy-to-pass round game in which a game medium is relatively easy to pass through the specific area and a difficult-to-pass round game in which a game medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area. Execution means;
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which only the difficult-to-pass round game is executed;
A second specific gaming state in which the easy-to-pass round game is executed at least once;
The notifying means has reached the special number of times that the first identification information and the second identification information have been changed after the end of the specific gaming state, and the first storage means stores the first specific information in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined notification is performed on condition that a first start memory for determining a gaming state is stored. A variable member that can be changed between an open mode in which a game medium can easily enter the second start area and a close mode in which the game medium cannot easily enter the second start area;
Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state in which the variable member is likely to change to an open mode after the end of the specific game state;
When the special gaming state control means is controlled to the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state, the special gaming state control means is provided that the number of variable displays of the first identification information and the second identification information has reached a specific number of times. In addition, the variable member can be controlled to a non-special gaming state that is difficult to change to an open mode,
The specific number of times, the first specific number of times, and the first number of times, on the condition that the specific gaming state is controlled by the specific gaming state control means and is controlled to the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. A specific number of times determining means for determining one of a plurality of types including a second specific number of times greater than one specific number of times,
The specific number determining means determines the second specific number of times in the special gaming state rather than the non-special gaming state as the gaming state before being controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control unit. Has a relatively high probability of
The notifying means has reached a special number in which the number of variable displays of the first identification information and the second identification information is less than the specific number after the specific gaming state is ended, and the specific gaming state is stored in the first starting memory. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the predetermined notification is performed on the condition that a first start memory for determining is stored.